JP2023133427A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing enjoyment of a display performance accompanied by a suggestion performance that suggests a result of determination regarding a game to a player.SOLUTION: A failure super ready-to-win D includes a ready-to-win failure screen by a development symbol HZ and a ready-to-win failure screen by a main decorative symbol SZ. A big winning super ready-to-win E includes the ready-to-win failure screen by the development symbol HZ, the ready-to-win failure screen by the main decorative symbol SZ, and a recovery big winning screen in which variations due to the decorative symbol SZ are recovered and a combination of big winnings is available. When a big winning super ready-to-win E is determined, a specific suggestion performance by a holding display TH that suggests the recovery of the variation by the decorative symbol SZ is executed before display of the failure screen by the decorative symbol SZ is terminated after the failure screen by the development symbol HZ is displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 43

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, this type of gaming machine, for example, obtains judgment information used for a predetermined judgment regarding a game when a predetermined condition is satisfied, makes a judgment regarding the game using the judgment information, and displays a display based on the result of the judgment. There are devices that display effects on a display device (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2018-33922A (Page 199 and Figure 209)

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in conventional gaming machines, there is a problem in that it is difficult to view the display effect while maintaining expectations for the result of the display effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest in display effects.

In order to achieve such an object, the present invention has the following configuration.
That is, the invention according to claim 1:
a main control means that performs main control regarding the game;
A gaming machine comprising: a sub-control means for performing secondary control according to instructions from the main control means,
The main control means is
determination information acquisition means for acquiring determination information used for determination regarding the game when a predetermined condition is met;
a determination means for making a determination regarding the game using the determination information,
The gaming machine is
comprising a display means capable of displaying a display effect including a symbol fluctuation display from when a plurality of symbols start varying until they stop at a combination indicating a determination result by the determination means;
The sub-control means
If the determination result is a winning result, a winning fluctuation pattern in which the symbol fluctuation display is stopped at a winning combination is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns indicating the fluctuation mode of the symbol fluctuation display, and the determination result is a winning combination. Fluctuation pattern determining means for determining a losing variation pattern in which the symbol variation display is stopped at a winning combination when the result is a winning combination;
Suggestion effect determining means for determining a predetermined suggestion effect from among a plurality of suggestion effects suggesting that the symbol variation display may match the winning combination;
The winning variation pattern includes a special variation stop in which the symbol variation display stops at a specific winning combination among the winning combinations, and a special variation stop in which the symbol variation display stops at a specific winning combination among the winning combinations. Including special winning fluctuation patterns that are executed after being temporarily displayed in winning combinations,
The gaming machine is
comprising a suggestion effect execution means for executing the predetermined suggestion effect determined by the suggestion effect determination means,
The suggested performance determining means may determine that, when the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means is the special winning fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means may be the special winning fluctuation pattern. determines to execute a special suggestion performance that suggests to the player that there is a
After the different winning combinations are displayed in a recognizable first display mode, the suggestion effect execution means changes the display mode of the different winning combinations to a second display mode while maintaining the different winning combinations. and the special suggestion effect determined by the suggestion effect determination means is started in a state in which the different winning combinations that have been changed can be recognized.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest in display effects.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 1 of the present invention. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. (a) shows the display contents of the third symbol display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a pending display. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for game control. This is a jackpot lottery table, where (a) shows normal probability and (b) shows high probability. This is a table for selecting variation patterns of main decorative patterns. This is a symbol variation display pattern selection table. This is a table for selecting a pending display pattern. This is a background change pattern selection table. This is a sound output pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows main processing by a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. It is a flowchart showing the first symbol variation process. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing starting prize winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process for pre-reading. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing main processing by the payout control device. It is a flow chart showing payout control processing. It is a flowchart which shows prize ball control processing. It is a flowchart which shows ball rental control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing by a sub-control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows frame button input monitoring and production processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows production execution management processing by a sub-control device. 12 is a flowchart illustrating processing for receiving a prefetch variation pattern designation command by the sub-control device. It is a flow chart showing opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting processing by the sub-control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display mode setting process by the sub-control device. 7 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart illustrating processing for switching display modes and the like by the display control device. It is a time chart of the jackpot fluctuation pattern. It is a time chart of various suggestive effects executed together with the jackpot fluctuation pattern including the revival effect. It is a time chart of a deviation fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing an example of execution of a completely off variation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing an example of execution of a variation pattern of a normal reach other than the front and back. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution of a fluctuation pattern of jackpot super reach. It is an explanatory view showing an example of execution of a variation pattern of super reach in front and back. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution of a variation pattern of a jackpot super reach different from that shown in FIG. 39. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution of a variation pattern of super reach that is different from the one shown in FIG. 40. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution of a variation pattern of the jackpot super reach different from those shown in FIGS. 39 and 41. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing an example of execution of a variation pattern of the jackpot super reach according to the second embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing an example of execution of a variation pattern of the jackpot super reach according to the third embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing an example of execution of a variation pattern of the jackpot super reach according to the fourth embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing an example of execution of a variation pattern of the jackpot super reach according to the fifth embodiment. It is a table for pre-reading notice pattern selection used in Example 6. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution of a prefetch notice pattern according to the sixth embodiment. It is a reservation display pattern selection table used in Example 7. It is a time chart explaining the pending display pattern in the case of a jackpot in Example 7. 12 is a time chart illustrating a hold display pattern in the case of failure in Example 7. This is an example of the execution of the jackpot super reach according to the seventh embodiment. This is an example of execution of the front-back super reach of Example 7. This is an example of the execution of the jackpot super reach according to the seventh embodiment.

Hereinafter, various embodiments of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described in detail based on the drawings.

Example 1 is an example of the present invention and the invention described below (A system).
The pachinko machine of Example 1 will be explained in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 5, (a) shows the display contents of the third symbol display device 42, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a pending display.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and is fixed to a game island of a game hall (hall), and one side (for example, the front side) of this outer frame 11. An inner frame 12 that is supported to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11 as an opening/closing axis J1 (left side in front view), and an inner frame 12 as an opening/closing axis J2 (one side of this inner frame 12 (for example, left side in front view)) The front frame set 14 is attached to the front frame set 12 so as to be openable and closable.

The outer frame 11 is made of wooden boards and has a rectangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and each board is assembled using removable fasteners such as machine screws. In this embodiment, for example, the outer frame 11 has an outer dimension in the vertical direction of 809 mm (inner dimension 771 mm) and an outer dimension in the left-right direction of 518 mm (inner dimension 480 mm). Note that the outer frame 11 may be made of resin, light metal such as aluminum, or the like.

Roughly speaking, the inner frame 12 includes a resin base 12a as a main member forming its outer shape, and a game board 30 attached to this resin base 12a. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the inner frame 12 includes a front frame set 14 that can be opened on one side on the front side of the resin base 12a.

Here, the front frame set 14 will be explained in more detail.

As shown in FIG. 1, when viewed from the front, the front frame set 14 includes a lower tray section 13 located at the lowest position, an upper tray section 21 located above the lower tray section 13, and this upper tray section. 21 and a glass frame portion 23 located above the glass frame portion 21 .

By attaching these lower plate part 13, upper plate part 21, and glass frame part 23 to various locations on the front side of the base plate body (not shown), which is a resin molded part of the front frame set 14, the front frame set 14 is configured.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower plate part 13 is a part in which parts forming the lower plate 15 and parts surrounding the part are integrated, and is located at the lowest part of the front frame set 14. , is fixed to the lowest part of the base plate (not shown) when viewed from the front using fasteners such as screws. The lower plate portion 13 includes a lower plate 15 and a ball removal lever 17 on its front side.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided on the left side of the large three-dimensional character section 25 when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front, and has a size approximately half the width of the front frame set 14. Game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. The ball removal lever 17 is for removing (ejecting) game balls from the lower tray 15. By moving the ball removal lever 17 to the left in FIG. For example, a circular discharge portion formed at a substantially central location is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 15 can be pulled out downwardly to the outside through the circular discharge portion opened at the bottom of the lower tray 15.

As shown in FIG. 1, the upper plate part 21 is a component in which a part forming the upper plate 19 and a part surrounding the part are integrated, and the lower part of the front frame set 14 (the above-mentioned lower plate 15 It is fixed to the lower portion of the base plate (not shown) by fasteners such as screws so as to be located at the upper position of the base plate (not shown), and is provided with an upper tray 19 as a receiving tray for game balls. Here, the upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray for temporarily storing game balls and guiding them toward the firing device 229 while arranging them in a line.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper tray section 21 is provided with various operation buttons operated by the player on its upper surface. These operation buttons include a production button 80 provided on the upper surface of the upper plate portion 21 near the ball storage space of the upper plate 19, and a production button 80 provided on the near side of the production button 80 (more accessible to the player than the production button 80). For example, an upper selection button 71, a lower selection button 72, a left selection button 73, and a right selection button 74 (selection buttons 71 to 74, when collectively referred to as selection buttons 71 to 74) are arranged side by side in a nearby location). In addition to the push button type, for example, a lever type, a touch sensor type, etc. may be used.

As shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame section 23 includes a window section 101 formed on the upper side of the upper tray section 21, and various illumination sections (first illumination section 300) provided around this window section 101. , a second illumination section 302 and a third illumination section 304) and sound output sections 24a and 24b. The sound output unit 24a includes a speaker that outputs normal sound in a frequency band that is output as the normal game progresses.

As shown in FIG. 1, the sound output unit 24 is provided at two locations on the left and right at the top of the front frame set 14 when viewed from the front, and outputs sound from speakers provided inside or at the back of the front frame set 14. It is formed with multiple output ports for This output port is only partially shown in FIG. 1 and is not shown in its entirety.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a gaming area 30a (see FIG. 3) of the gaming board 30 in the center of the glass frame 23 located above the upper tray 21. A window portion 101 having a substantially vertically elongated oval shape is formed so that most of it can be viewed from the outside. Specifically, the window portion 101 has a substantially vertically elliptical shape with a cavity (opening 101a) in the center, and a glass unit (not shown) is installed so that the opening 101a is covered with a glass plate 137 having a substantially vertically elliptical shape. is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. This glass unit has a double glass structure in which two glass plates 137 are arranged close to each other in the front and back direction. Note that the substantially central portion of the window portion 101 may be formed into a straight line, and the glass plate 137 may also be made to match the shape. Further, the glass plate 137 is not limited to glass, and may be made of any material as long as it is a transparent plate with a predetermined strength.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame section 23 includes a first illumination section 300, a second illumination section 302, and a third illumination section 304 around the window section 101. To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a first illumination section 300 (left side illumination section) with built-in LEDs etc. on the left side around the window section 101 when viewed from the front. ) on the right side around the window 101, a second illumination section 302 (right side illumination section) with a built-in LED etc., and a third illumination section 302 (right side illumination section) with a built-in LED etc. around the window section 101. A decorative portion 304 (upper illumination portion) is provided. These illumination parts play the role of enhancing the performance effect during the game by changing the lighting mode such as lighting or blinking according to changes in the gaming state such as when hitting a jackpot or reaching a predetermined reach.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first illumination section 300, the second illumination section 302, and the third illumination section 304 function as jackpot lamps, and notify that a jackpot is in progress by lighting or blinking when a jackpot is hit. do. In addition, the first illumination section 300 and the second illumination section 302 of the pachinko machine 10 are equipped with a prize ball lamp 105 that lights up during prize ball payout, and an error display lamp 106 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs. There is.

Further, a small window 107 made of transparent resin is provided at the lower right corner of the periphery of the window portion 101 so that a portion of the surface of the inner frame 12, the surface of the game board 30, etc. can be visually recognized. Since the predetermined portion of the small window 107 is flat, the certificate stamp etc. affixed to the lower right corner of the game board 30 can be suitably read by machine from the flat portion of the small window 107.

Further, a ball rental operation section 120 is provided at the lower right of the window section 101, and the ball rental operation section 120 is provided with a ball rental button 121 and a return button 122. When the ball rental operation unit 120 is operated with bills, cards (for example, prepaid cards), etc. inserted into a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 120 is operated. Game balls will be available for loan. The ball rental button 121 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and the rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball rental operation section 120 may further be provided with a frequency display section (not shown). This frequency display section (not shown) displays information on the balance of the card, etc. Note that the ball lending operation unit 120 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. Therefore, a decorative sticker or the like is attached to the installation part of the ball lending operation section 120. This makes it possible to share the ball lending operation section between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be explained using FIG. 3. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a game board 30b that is made of rectangular wood (for example, plywood) and has both left corners cut off when viewed from the front. The outer portions of the rails 51 and 52) are attached to the inner frame 12 in a state where they are in contact with the back side of the resin base 12a. The game area 30a, which is approximately the central part of the front side of the game board 30, is opened through the glass plate 137 of the window 101 shown in FIG. It is visible from the front outside of the frame set 14.

The game board 30 also includes a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning device 33 (for example, an operating chuck), a third starting opening 34 (for example, a through gate), and a variable display unit 35. These general winning opening 31, variable winning winning device 32, starting winning device 33, third starting opening 34, and variable display device unit 35 are arranged in respective through holes formed by router processing on the game board 30. It is attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like.

The starting winning device 33 is composed of a single winning device in which a first starting port 33a (for example, an operating chucker) and a second starting port 33b (for example, an operating chucker) are disposed vertically from the top. There is. The first starting port 33a on the upper side is provided with an operating port switch (passage detection switch) for the first starting port 33a (not shown), and the entry of the ball into the first starting port 33a is controlled by the first starting port 33a. It is detected by the actuation port switch for the first starting port 33a. Further, the second starting port 33b on the lower side is provided with an operating port switch (passage detection switch) not shown for the second starting port 33b. It is detected by the operating port switch for the second starting port 33b. In either case, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33a on the upper side or enters the second starting port 33b on the lower side, it is a starting prize. There is no difference, and these incoming balls can be detected individually.

In addition, the ball entering the general winning opening 31 is detected by a detection switch (winning opening switch not shown), the ball entering the variable winning device 32 is detected by a detection switch (counting switch not shown), and this Based on the output of the detection switch, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (or lower tray 15).

For example, in the case of balls entering the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b, three prize balls are paid out. Furthermore, in the case of balls entering the general winning hole 31 and the variable winning device 32, ten prize balls are paid out. Note that the number of these prize balls is arbitrary and may be various numbers.

Note that when a game ball enters the third starting port 34, the entering ball is detected by a detection switch (passage detection switch, not shown), but even if the ball enters the third starting port 34, Payout of game balls is not executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that have not entered various winning devices etc. are passed through this out port 36 to a ball discharge path (not shown). You will be guided towards the A large number of nails 39 are planted on the game board 30 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill 37 are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the variable display device unit 35 variably displays a first symbol (for example, a special symbol) as identification information, triggered by winning in the first starting hole 33a and the second starting hole 33b. A first symbol display device 40, a second symbol display device 41 that variably displays a second symbol (for example, a normal symbol) using passage through the third starting port 34 as a trigger; It is provided with a third symbol display device 42 that variably displays a third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol) using a winning in the starting hole 33b as a trigger. The third symbol display device 42 may be, for example, a display device exclusively for display effects, or a light-transmitting resin plate such as an acrylic panel provided in place of or together with the glass plate 137 and capable of displaying an image.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first symbol display device 40 is, for example, a first segment display that is a segment display (for example, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point) in which a plurality of segment light emitting parts are arranged in a predetermined manner. A portion 40a is provided. The first segment display section 40a emits variable light based on the ball entering the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b. Furthermore, the first symbol display device 40, as shown in FIG. 3, includes a reservation lamp 40c that indicates the number of reservations in the variable display on the first segment display section 40a. The hold lamp 40c is also configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the third symbol display device 42 displays the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4 corresponding to the four pending lamps 40c and the currently executed variation pattern. A corresponding pending display TH is provided. In FIG. 5(a), when the number of reservations is 4, the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the reservation display TH is started, and when the number of reservations is 4, the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the reservation display TH is confirmed to be off. Or, when the number of reservations is 4, it shows the time of variable display of the decorative pattern (third pattern) consisting of the main decorative pattern SZ and the sub-decorative pattern FZ in the pattern variable display corresponding to the pending display TH. The first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4 and the pending display TH are displayed in colors according to the high possibility of a jackpot. That is, as shown in FIG. 5(b), if the colors are shown in descending order of probability of a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot increases in the order of white, blue, red, and rainbow colors. A white hold indicates that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot combination, or that the possibility of a jackpot combination is low. For blue holds, the possibility of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold being a jackpot is higher than the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the white hold, but it is less likely to be a jackpot than the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the red hold. This suggests that it is relatively low. Red color suggests that the volatility pattern corresponding to that hold is higher than the volatility pattern corresponding to the blue hold. A rainbow-colored hold is most likely to result in a jackpot, suggesting that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold is determined to be a jackpot combination. Note that FIG. 5A shows that the first to fourth hold displays H1 to H4 and the hold display TH are white.

The first segment display section 40a displays a variable display of the first symbol by changing the light emission of each segment light emitting section randomly or sequentially based on the ball entering the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b. If a state (in this example, the light emission variation mode of each segment light emitting part) is generated, and the first symbol (for example, a number or letter) is displayed by light emission when the light emission variation stops, a 16R probability jackpot (first specific win) is generated. ), and when the second symbol (e.g. numbers, letters, etc.) is displayed luminescently, it means an 8R guaranteed strange jackpot (second specific win), and when the third symbol (e.g. numbers, letters, etc.) is luminescently displayed, it means an 8R regular jackpot ( It means a non-specific win), and when the fourth symbol (for example, a number or letter) is displayed with light, it means a loss. Note that the display of the first to fourth symbols on the first segment display section 40a does not mean that even if a general player sees them, he or she does not know what they mean. , 8R probability variable jackpot, 8R normal jackpot or miss is displayed in a way that makes it unclear (or difficult to understand).

In this way, when a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variation jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot occurs, the variable prize winning device 32 enters a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot state) to be described later.

Note that, as the first symbol display device 40, a single or plural LEDs of a type capable of emitting light of at least two colors or more may be employed. Specifically, taking as an example a case where two LEDs capable of emitting red and blue light are employed as the first symbol display device 40, by alternately changing the emission color of each LED, the first symbol display device 40 A variable display state of the symbol (emission color mode of each LED) is generated. For example, when both LEDs stop emitting red light, it indicates a variable jackpot (specific hit), and when one LED stops emitting red light and the other When the LED goes out, it indicates a latent probability variable jackpot (latent specific win), when both LEDs stop emitting blue light, it indicates a normal jackpot (non-specific win), and when both LEDs stop emitting light of different colors, it is a win. One example is to show the following. Further, at least one of the first segment display section 40a and the hold lamp 40c constituting the first symbol display device 40 may be replaced with another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. It may be configured by, or in particular, may be configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42. In addition, the patterns displayed on the first pattern display device 40 include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. A configuration in which colors are displayed may be considered.

The second symbol display device 41 includes, for example, a “○” display section 41a for the second symbol, a display section 41b on which, for example, an "x" is drawn for the second symbol, and a hold lamp 41c, Every time the game ball passes through the third starting port 34, the displayed symbols (normal symbols) on the display sections 41a and 41b change, and when the fluctuating display stops at a predetermined pattern, the second starting port on the lower side changes. 33b is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time. The number of times the game ball has passed through the third starting port 34 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times the game ball has passed through the third starting port 34 is displayed by lighting on the hold lamp 41c. The display sections 41a and 41b have LEDs (light emitting diodes) therein, and are configured to display a variable display by switching the light emission of the LEDs (or lighting of lamps). Further, at least one of the second symbol display device 41 and the hold lamp 41c may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display, and in particular, It may also be configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

In the third symbol display device 42, a variable display and a predetermined display (stop display) of the first symbol are performed on the first symbol display device 40 based on winnings in the first starting hole 33a and the second starting hole 33b. When the third symbol is displayed, a variable display and a predetermined display (stop display) of the third symbol are performed accordingly. In addition, the third symbol display device 42 not only displays a display triggered by winning the first starting hole 33a or the second starting hole 33b, but also displays during a specific gaming state that changes after winning a jackpot. There will be performances, etc.

The third symbol display device 42 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and its display contents are controlled by a display control device 45, which will be described later. The third symbol display device 42 displays three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R on the left, middle, and right, as shown in FIG. 5, for example. Each of the decorative symbol rows L, M, and R is composed of a plurality of decorative symbols, and these decorative symbols are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 42 so as to be scrolled for each decorative symbol row L, M, and R. Ru. In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) includes, for example, a large 11-inch liquid crystal display. A center frame 47 is disposed in the variable display unit 35 on the front side of the third symbol display device 42 so as to substantially surround the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the third pattern display device 42, but other types of image display devices (for example, PDP: plasma display panel, EL: electroluminescence display, organic EL, etc.) may be adopted.

The variable winning device 32 shown in FIG. 3 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win (or may be in a closed state in which it is difficult to win), and in an open state in which game balls are likely to win in the event of a jackpot. It is operated repeatedly between the closed state and the closed state. In this way, the state in which the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly operated between the open state and the normal closed state when winning a jackpot is called a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot state), and the variable winning device 32 is operated repeatedly between the open state and the normal closed state. A ball enters the ball (wins a prize) and a large amount of game balls are paid out in response to the winning, making the game situation advantageous for the player. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the number of game balls thrown in (the number of game balls fired into the gaming area 30a by the firing device 229) is higher than the number of game balls paid out (general prize opening 31, variable The normal game state (game ball consumption state) and the prize of game balls are larger than the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the winning device 32, the first starting port 33a, the second starting port 33b, etc. The state can be changed to a specific game state (for example, a jackpot state) in which the number of balls paid out is greater than the number of game balls thrown in.

More specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33a or the second starting hole 33b, the first segment display section 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is displayed in a variable manner, and the first segment after the variation stops is displayed. A specific gaming state occurs when the display on the display section 40a stops at a preset symbol. For example, when the first symbol is displayed in a stopped state, it means that a specific gaming state of 16R guaranteed variable jackpot (first specific win) has been won, and when the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state, it means that the specific gaming state of 16R guaranteed variable jackpot (first specific win) has been won. It means that you have won a specific gaming state of 8R normal jackpot (non-specific winning), and if the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it means that you have won a specific gaming state of 8R normal jackpot (non-specific winning), and the fourth symbol If it is stopped and displayed, it means that you have failed (failed to enter the specific game state).

When a specific gaming state occurs, the variable winning device 32 is configured so that the big winning hole 32a is opened to a predetermined state, and the game ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize (jackpot state). Specifically, the big prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds), with the elapse of a predetermined time or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes in the open state as one round. In addition, the number of times the game ball passes through the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times the game ball is held is indicated by the holding lamps 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, 40c4 (when collectively referred to as the holding lamp 40c). The hold lamps 40c are lit in the order of 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, and 40c4. Note that the hold lamp 40c may be configured to be held and displayed on a part of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 3, two rails 51 and 52 are attached to the game board 30 for guiding the game balls fired from the firing device 229 (see FIG. 2) to the upper part of the game board 30. The game balls fired with the rotational operation of the game ball firing handle 18 are guided to a predetermined game area 30a through a ball guide path 49, which will be described later, of two rails 51 and 52. The two rails 51 and 52 are elongated metal band members made of stainless steel, and are attached to the game board 30 on both the inner and outer sides. When the game board 30 is viewed from the front, the inner rail 51 is formed in the shape of a substantially vertical ellipse, excluding the portion extending clockwise from the diagonally upper left to the diagonally lower right. The outer rail 52 is formed so that a portion (mainly the left side) faces the inner rail 51. In such a case, the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 constitute a guide rail, and the ball guide path 49 is formed by the portion where these rails 51 and 52 are parallel to each other at a predetermined interval (the portion on the left side when facing the ball). . The ball guide passage 49 is formed in a groove shape having a contact surface with the game board 30, that is, a groove shape with the front side open.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 51 (upper left in FIG. 3). This prevents the game ball from returning to the ball guide path 49 once guided to the upper part of the game board 30 from the ball guide path 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52. In addition, when the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12, the position corresponding to the maximum flying part of the game ball on the outer rail 52 (the upper right part of FIG. 3: the part corresponding to the tip of the outer rail 52) , the return rubber 54 is located. Therefore, a game ball shot with a force exceeding a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is bounced back. Since the outer rail 52 is an elongated stainless steel metal band, the flight of the game ball can be made smoother, that is, the frictional resistance of the game ball can be reduced. As shown in FIG. 3, the area from the tip of the outer rail 52 (upper right in FIG. 3) to the right tip of the inner rail 51 (lower right in FIG. 3) is the gaming area on the first symbol display device 40. The gaming area 30a is partitioned by the position of the wall 56 on the 30a side and the wall 55 (shown by broken lines in FIG. 3) formed on the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lower right corner of the game board 30 is a space for pasting a seal SL (which may also be a plate) such as a certificate stamp (on which a serial number is written, for example). By pasting a seal SL such as a certificate stamp on the lower right corner of the game board 30, uniqueness can be given between the game board 30 and the certificate stamp.

Next, the game area 30a of the game board 30 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 3, the game area 30a is defined by the inner circumferential portions (inner and outer rails) of an inner rail 51 and an outer rail 52 into a substantially vertically oblong circular shape. The game area 30a divided on the board surface is large.

In this embodiment, the gaming area 30a is defined as an area surrounded by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, excluding the area of the guide rail which is the parallel portion of the inner and outer rails 51 and 52. This is an area where Therefore, since the guide rail portion is not included in the gaming area 30a, the left-hand limit position of the gaming area 30a is specified not by the outer rail 52 but by the inner rail 51. Further, the right side limit position of the gaming area 30a is specified by the wall portion 55 (a part of the inner frame 12). Further, the lower limit position of the gaming area 30a is specified by the inner rail 51. Further, the upper limit position of the gaming area 30a is specified by the outer rail 52.

Although detailed drawings will not be disclosed, game balls are supplied to the firing device 229 one by one from an unillustrated ball outlet of the front frame set 14 (a ball outlet leading from the most downstream part of the upper tray 19). .

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the pachinko machine 10 (actually the back of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30), various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and predetermined control boards are stacked front and back ( For example, the payout control board 311a in FIG. 4, which will be described later, is on the front side when viewed from the back, and the power supply control board of the power supply device 313 and the launch control board of the launch control device 312 are located on the back side of the payout control board 311a. Furthermore, a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism section 352) for supplying game balls, a protective cover 353 made of resin, etc. are attached. In this embodiment, various control boards are mounted separately on a plurality of (three) mounting bases 230 to 232 shown in FIG. It is attached to the back of the game board 30. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control device 261 is mounted on the mounting base 230, the sub-control device 262 is mounted on the mounting base 232 to form a unit, and the dispensing control device 311 and the firing control device 312 and a power supply device 313 are mounted on a mounting base 231 to form a unit.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the payout mechanism section 352 has various parts (a tank 355, a tank rail 356, a case rail 357, a payout device 358, and a power switch board 382, which will be described later) upside down when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The dispensing mechanism section 352 and the protective cover 353 are also integrated as one unit, and this unit is sometimes referred to as the back pack, so here we refer to it as the "back pack". Pack unit 203".

The back pack unit 203 is configured so that it can be attached and detached unit by unit without using any tools, and in addition, a part of the back pack unit 203 is provided with a support shaft so that it can be attached to and detached from the inner frame 12 or the back of the game board 30. It has a structure that can be opened and closed. This is also a contrivance to make it possible to easily check hidden structures etc. even if the back pack unit 203 and other structures are arranged one on top of the other.

Further, on the back side of the game board 30, there is provided a winning detection mechanism for detecting passage of game balls such as various winning holes. Specifically, a winning hole switch (not shown) is provided on the front side of the game board 30 at a position corresponding to the general winning hole 31, and the variable winning device 32 is provided with a count switch (not shown). The count switch is a switch that counts winning balls. Further, at positions corresponding to the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b, there is an operating port switch (not shown) for the first starting port 33a and an operating port switch (not shown) for the second starting port 33b. (omitted) (not shown) are respectively provided, and entry of game balls into the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b is detected by the respective operating port switches. A gate switch is provided at a position corresponding to the third starting port 34, and passage of the game ball to the third starting port 34 is detected by the gate switch.

The winning opening switch (not shown) of the general winning opening 31 and the gate switch of the third starting opening 34 are connected to a board connection board (not shown) through electrical wiring (not shown), and this board connection board also controls the main control described later. It is connected to the main control board 261a (see FIG. 4) in the device 261. Further, the count switch of the variable winning device 32 is connected to a big winning opening relay terminal board (not shown), and this big winning opening relay terminal board is also connected to the main control board 261a. On the other hand, each operating port switch of the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b is directly connected to the main control board 261a without using a relay board.

Although other illustrations are omitted, the variable winning device 32 is provided with a big winning opening solenoid for opening the big winning opening 32a, and a second starting opening 33b on the lower side is provided for opening an electric accessory. An operating port solenoid is provided.

The detection results detected by the above-mentioned winning detection mechanism are taken into the main control board 261a in the main control device 261, which will be described later, and the main control board 261a sends a payout command (game ball) according to the winning situation each time. The number of payout pieces) is transmitted to the payout control board 311a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are put out based on the output of the payout control board 311a.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main control device 261 is mounted on the lower mounting base 230 of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the rear, and the sub-control device 262 is mounted on the upper mounting base 232 of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the rear. has been done. Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 261 includes a CPU 501 that performs main control, a ROM 502 that stores game programs, a RAM 503 that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, and various devices. The main control includes an input/output port 505 for communication, a random number generator (not shown) used in various lottery drawings, and a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) used for time counting and synchronization. The main control board 261a is housed in a board box 263 (enveloping means) made of a transparent resin material or the like. Note that the substrate box 263 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing unit 261c, thereby sealing the substrate box 263.

Further, the sub-control device 262 includes, for example, a CPU 551 that controls audio and lamp displays and controls the display control device 45 in accordance with instructions from a main control board 261a in the main control device 261, a ROM 552, a RAM 553, a bus line 554, and the like. It is equipped with a sub-control board 262a including an input/output port 555, etc., and this sub-control board 262a is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. Power supplied from a power supply board, which will be described later, is output to the display control device 45 via the sub-control device 262.

As shown in FIG. 2, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are mounted on a mounting base 231. The payout control device 311 includes a CPU serving as the center of control, and a control board including ROM, RAM, various ports, and the like. Further, the launch control device 312 includes a launch control board. Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power control board. The payout control board 311a of the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls. Further, the launch control board of the launch control device 312 controls the launch device 229 (see FIG. 4) according to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 18, and the power supply board of the power supply device 313 controls various control devices, etc. A required predetermined power supply voltage is generated and output. The firing device 229 of this embodiment employs a solenoid-type firing component that strikes and fires a game ball with a firing mallet (not shown) that can move forward and backward according to energization/de-energization of a firing solenoid (not shown). In addition, there are various other types of launching devices 229, such as mechanical launching parts that fire game balls by hitting them with a firing pestle that operates according to the drive of a firing motor, and electromagnetic firing parts that fire game balls by generating an electromagnetic field. You may also adopt the type of The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball rental operation section 120 (see FIG. 1) on the front of the pachinko machine and the card unit (not shown), and receives commands for ball rental operations from players and transfers them to the payout control device 311. This is what is output to. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 is not necessary.

The payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are each housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the dispensing control device 311, similarly to the main control device 261 described above, a box base and a box cover that constitute the substrate box 311b (enveloping means) are unopenably connected by a sealing unit (sealing means). The board box 311b is sealed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 311c. For example, if the status recovery switch 311c is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor section, the dispensing motor 358a (see FIG. 4) is slowly rotated in the forward direction to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state). ) is planned.

Further, a RAM erase switch 323 is provided on the power supply monitoring board 261b. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and even in the event of a power outage, it can maintain the state at the time of the power outage, and upon recovery from the power outage (power restoration), it can return to the state at the time of the power outage. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure (for example, at the end of the hall's business hours), the state before power off will be retained in memory, so if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, turn on the power while holding down the RAM erase switch 323. We are planning to invest in it.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 203 is a unit that integrates a resin-molded protective cover 353 and a game ball payout mechanism section 352.

The back pack unit 203 is provided with a tank 355 that opens upward at the top thereof, and this tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment (game island equipment) of the game hall. A tank rail 356 is connected below the tank 355 and has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently slopes downward toward the downstream side, and further downstream of the tank rail 356 is a vertical case rail 357. are connected. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out as appropriate using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor 358a. The game balls put out by the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 through a payout passage (not shown) or the like.

Further, the tank rail 356 is provided with a vibrator 360 for applying vibration to the tank rail 356. For example, the vibrator 360 is fastened and attached to the tank rail 356 with, for example, two screws. Furthermore, the vibrator 360 does not make surface contact with the tank rail 356, but contacts the two screws, and the vibrations caused by the vibrator 360 are transmitted to the tank rail 356 more effectively. Therefore, even if a ball jam occurs near the tank rail 356, the vibrator 360 is driven to eliminate the ball jam.

The payout mechanism section 352 is equipped with a payout relay board (not shown) that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in main power from the outside. is set up. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24V main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 from the tank 355 to the dispensing passage (not shown) is all molded from a conductive resin material (for example, conductive polycarbonate resin), and a part of it is grounded (earthed). . This suppresses the generation of noise due to charging of the game balls.

As shown in FIG. 2, an inner frame open detection switch 388 is provided on the upper right side of the inner frame 12 to detect that the inner frame 12 is opened relative to the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, an output is output from the inner frame open detection switch 388 to the computer for use in the hall (inside the pachinko parlor).

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using FIG. 4. The pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 261, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a sub-control device 262, a display control device 45, an audio output control device 47, a power supply device 313, etc. . Each of these devices will be described in detail below.

The main control device 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. A certain RAM 503 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in.

The RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. It has memory and area.

In other words, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes normal processing to the end, so the RAM 503 is It is only necessary to memorize and hold the contents of the counter buffer and the reserved ball storage area, and when the power is turned on again, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was turned off. Specifically, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated backup area in the RAM 503 for storing the values of each register, I/O, etc. regarding game information during normal processing when the power is turned off. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal S1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 505 includes a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a sub-control device 262, a first symbol display device 40, a second symbol display device 41, and other switch groups not shown. etc. are connected. The main control device 261 also has a function of controlling the variable display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 40 and the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 41.

Like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. , the RAM 513 includes memory and areas for temporarily storing various data and the like.

The RAM 513 stores and holds information regarding the state of the pachinko machine 10 when the power is turned off in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again when the power is turned off due to a power outage or the like. In other words, memory retention in the RAM 513 is executed when the power is turned off by the NMI interrupt process and the second half of the payout control process, and conversely, restoration of the information stored in the RAM 513 is executed in the power recovery process when the power is turned on. .

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the main control device 261, the firing control device 312, the dispensing motor 358a, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 4, the firing control device 312 allows or prohibits the firing device 229 from firing game balls, and the firing device 229 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the launch control device 312 receives a card unit connection signal S4 from the payout control device 311 (a signal output when the aforementioned card unit is connected to the pachinko machine 10) and a player A touch detection signal S5 is output when the game ball firing handle 18 is touched, and a touch detection signal S5 is output when the firing stop switch 18a provided on the game ball firing handle 18 for stopping firing is not operated. The firing permission signal S7 is output to the main controller 261 on the condition that all of the firing sustaining signals S6 and the firing sustaining signal S6 are input. Further, a volume signal S10 corresponding to the amount of operation of the game ball firing handle 18 is input from the game ball firing handle 18 to the firing control device 312, and the firing control device 312 outputs this volume signal S10 to the main controller 261. do.

That is, the period when the firing permission signal S7 is ON (high level) is the firing permission state, and the period when the firing permission signal S7 is OFF (low level) is the firing disallowed state. In other words, the main controller 261 controls the firing control signal S8 (pulse signal) that controls the firing solenoid (not shown) that fires the game ball and the firing rail during the period when the input firing permission signal S7 is ON. A ball sending control signal S9 (pulse signal) for controlling a ball sending solenoid that sends game balls is repeatedly output to the launch control device 312 at a predetermined repetition period. The amplitude value of the firing control signal S8 (pulse signal) is determined in the main controller 261 based on the volume signal S10. ) becomes larger. The firing control device 312 drives and controls the firing device 229 based on the firing control signal S8 and the ball feeding control signal S9, and the game ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the game ball firing handle 18. Conversely, the main controller 261 does not output the launch control signal S8 and the ball feeding control signal S9 to the launch control device 312 during the period when the input launch permission signal S7 is OFF, and the game ball is not outputted by the launch device 229. is never fired.

The display control device 45 controls the variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) on the third symbol display device 42. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a ROM (program ROM) 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, an image controller 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It is equipped with The output of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, ROM 522, work RAM 523, and image controller 526 are connected to the output of the input port 527. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the image controller 526 via a bus line 531, and the third symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output of the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the decorative pattern display on the third pattern display device 42 based on various commands sent from the main control device 261 that are edited by the sub-control device 262 and transmitted. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. This is the memory for.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524, the display contents of the third symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as decorative symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The image controller 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the output port 529 to intervene in reading and writing of data, and also reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 from the character ROM 525 at a predetermined timing and outputs the third It is displayed on the symbol display device 42.

The audio output control device 46 controls the output of audio from the sound output section 24a. This audio output control device 46 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and executes processing to control the output of normal audio and specific sound in accordance with the display performance on the third symbol display device 42. be. The ROM stores programs and sound data for audio output processing. The audio output unit 24a includes an amplifier, a speaker, and the like for outputting audio.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10. The power supply section 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc. through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 541 takes in 24 volt AC power supplied from the outside and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. Then, these +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, and the like. Note that operating power (+12V power, +5V power, etc.) is supplied to the firing control device 312 via the payout control device 311.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 261 includes a main control board 261a and a power monitoring board 261b separate from the main control board 261a in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. . The power monitoring board 261b includes a power outage monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power cutoff due to power outage, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal S1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors the AC 24 volt voltage in the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred if this voltage is less than 22 volts for more than 20 milliseconds, for example. , outputs a power outage signal S1 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal S1, the main control device 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute a power outage process (NMI interrupt process).

Note that even after the time period during which the AC 24 volts monitored by the power supply unit 541 becomes less than 22 volts exceeds 20 milliseconds, the power supply unit 541 continues to perform the power outage process for a sufficient time to execute the power outage process. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power outage process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit for taking in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clearing backup data in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal S2 to the main control board 261a. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 being pressed (including turning on the power after a power outage is resolved), the data in the RAM 503 is cleared in the main controller 261, and the payout control device 311 is switched on as the main controller. Upon receiving the initialization command from H.261, the data in the RAM 513 is cleared.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 5, the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) has three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R on the left, middle, and right. Three decorative patterns, ie, a top decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern, and a bottom decorative pattern, are displayed in a variable manner for each of M and R. In the present embodiment, the series of patterns is composed of a main decorative pattern SZ with numbers "0" to "9" attached to each, and a sub-decorative pattern FZ consisting of a diamond-shaped pictorial pattern. Main decorative patterns SZ are displayed in ascending or descending order, and sub-decorative patterns FZ are arranged between each main decorative pattern SZ to form a series of decorative pattern rows L, M, R. The main decorative pattern SZ and the secondary decorative pattern FZ are displayed periodically from top to bottom.

In such a case, in the left decorative pattern row L, the above-mentioned series of decorative symbols are displayed in descending order (that is, in the order in which the number of the main decorative pattern SZ decreases), and in the middle decorative pattern row M and the right decorative pattern row R, the above series of decorative symbols are displayed in the same order. The above-mentioned series of decorative symbols are displayed in ascending order (that is, in order of increasing number of main decorative symbols SZ). Then, the variable display stops in the order of left decorative pattern row L→right decorative pattern row R→middle decorative pattern row M, and when it stops, the five active lines on the third symbol display device 42, namely the upper line L1, the middle line If the main decorative patterns SZ are aligned in a jackpot pattern combination (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main decorative patterns SZ) on any of L2, lower line L3, right-up line L4, and left-up line L5, it will be special as a jackpot. A game video will be displayed.

The main decorative pattern SZ is composed of a number part SZa where numbers are drawn and a decorative part SZb where characters such as people and animals are decoratively drawn. For example, the main decorative pattern SZ "1" arranged in three decorative pattern rows L, M, and R has a number part SZa "1" and the same characters ("2" to "1") in the frame surrounding "1". 9), and a decorative portion SZb on which a character different from "9" is drawn. The same applies to the main decorative patterns SZ "2" to "9".

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 uses the random numbers related to the actuation of the accessory and other random numbers used for the game to draw the lottery (jackpot lottery: first lottery) on the first symbol display device 40. jackpot lottery of symbols) and symbol display settings, lottery (second symbol winning lottery) and symbol display settings of the second symbol display device 41, decorative symbols (third symbol) of the third symbol display device 42, etc. We are planning to conduct a lottery regarding variable display and its settings.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot lottery on the first symbol display device 40 and the first A jackpot symbol counter C2 used for selecting a jackpot symbol on the symbol display device 40, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a second symbol counter CINI1 used for the jackpot lottery on the second symbol display device 41. A two symbol random number counter C4 and an initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 used for initial value setting of the second symbol random number counter C4 are used.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 6, other random numbers used for the game are used to roughly specify the type of the variation pattern when selecting the variation pattern of the decorative symbols on the third symbol display device 42. A stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select a stop pattern, a variation type counter CS1, CS2, CS3 used to select a variation pattern of decorative symbols on the third symbol display device 42, and a missing symbol on the second symbol display device 41. A second symbol off symbol counter C5 used for selection is used. Each of the above-mentioned counters is configured by a program executed by the CPU 501.

For example, "Stop pattern 0" indicates a completely out-of-reach variation pattern group consisting of multiple types of completely out-of-reach variation patterns, and "Stop pattern 1" indicates a group of out-of-front reach variation patterns consisting of multiple types of out-of-front reach variation patterns. , "Stop pattern 2" indicates a group of reach fluctuation patterns other than front and rear outliers consisting of multiple types of reach fluctuation patterns other than front and rear outliers, and "Stopping pattern 3" is a group of reach fluctuation patterns other than front and rear outliers, and "Stopping pattern 3" is a group of reach fluctuation patterns other than front and back outliers. "Stop pattern 4" shows a group of probability variable jackpot variation patterns consisting of a plurality of types of probability variable jackpot variation patterns.

For all these counters C1 to C5, CINI1 to CINI2, and CS1 to CS3, each time they are updated, "1" is added to the previous value (hereinafter referred to as "update"), and after reaching the maximum value, it becomes "0". It is a loop counter that returns. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored as appropriate in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. Further, the RAM 503 is provided with one execution area and a holding ball storage area consisting of four holding areas (first holding area, second holding area, third holding area, fourth holding area), In each of these areas, values such as a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot symbol counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the winning history of game balls in the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b. It is stored in chronological order. Note that the winning of game balls into the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b is also referred to as the establishment of the starting condition. Each value stored in the execution area is called a variable display for the executed portion, and each value stored in the reserved ball storage area is also called a variable display for the unexecuted portion.

Specifically, if the start condition is met during a period in which the execution area and the held ball storage area do not store any fluctuation display for either the executed or unexecuted ball, the execution area will display the fluctuation display for the executed ball. is stored. If the start condition is met during the period when the execution area is storing the fluctuation display of the executed minutes, the unexecuted minutes are stored in the order of the first holding area, the second holding area, the third holding area, and the fourth holding area. The variable display of is stored. When the executed variation display is stored in the execution area, the variation non-execution condition that does not execute the symbol variation display is satisfied regarding the unexecuted variation display stored in the reserved ball storage area.

The variable display of unexecuted portions stored in the first holding area, second holding area, third holding area, and fourth holding area are also referred to as first holding, second holding, third holding, and fourth holding.

Each of the above-mentioned counters will be explained in detail below using FIG. 6. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of, for example, "0" to "599", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "599"). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 17) described later, and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 17) described later. (See FIG. 14) is repeatedly updated within the remaining time. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 17) described later), and when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33a or the second starting hole 33b. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the appropriate timing.

The winning value of the jackpot random number counter C1, that is, the number of random number values that result in a jackpot, is set in two types for low probability and high probability, and the number of random number values that result in a jackpot when the probability is low is 2. The value is "150,450", and the number of random number values that result in a jackpot when the probability is high is 4, and the values are "50,150,350,450". That is, when the probability is low, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and when the probability is high, the jackpot probability is 1/150. In addition, high probability times refer to, for example, times when a predetermined probability fluctuating pattern results in a jackpot, and the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value, the so-called "certain change" time, and is different from normal times (low probability times). refers to the time when there is no such definite change state. Further, the high probability state (variable probability state) continues until the next jackpot after the end of the variable probability jackpot or the latent probability variable jackpot (after the jackpot 32a of the variable winning device 32 has been opened for 16 rounds, for example).

The jackpot symbol counter C2 is the symbol at the time when the fluctuation of the first segment display section 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops (in this embodiment, the final display symbol after the fluctuation display of the first segment display section 40a) at the time of a jackpot. ). In this embodiment, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is configured such that, for example, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of "0" to "99", and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). There is. The jackpot symbol counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 17) to be described later) as in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 described above, and the game ball is placed in the first starting hole 33a, the first The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the ball enters the starting hole 33b of No. 2.

A jackpot lottery table using the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot symbol counter C2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7(a) is a jackpot lottery table for normal probability, and FIG. 7(b) is a jackpot lottery table for high probability. When the jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0" to "39", the first segment display section 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops at the third symbol, 8R Indicates a normal jackpot (non-specific win). In addition, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0" to "39", the decorative symbol is "7" like "1", "3", "5", "9", etc. as described later. Aligned with odd numbered patterns excluding. Next, when the aforementioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "40" to "79", the first segment display section 40a of the first symbol display device 40 It stops at the symbol and indicates an 8R surefire jackpot (second specific win). In addition, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "40" to "79", the decorative symbols are arranged in even numbered symbols such as "2", "4", "6", and "8" as described later. . Next, when the aforementioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "80" to "99", the first segment display section 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is It stops at the symbol and indicates a 16R definite jackpot (first specific win). Further, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "80" to "99", the decorative symbols are all set to "7" as described later. In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loss, the first segment display section 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops at the fourth symbol to indicate a loss, regardless of the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2. In other words, the distribution of jackpot types is 16R probability variation: 8R probability variation: normal = 2:4:4.

Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of, for example, "0" to "238", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (ie, 238). In this embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects a "front/back off reach" in which the final stop decorative pattern is shifted by one position before or after the reach decorative pattern on the third symbol display device 42 after the reach of the decorative pattern occurs. '', similarly, after a reach occurs, the final stop decorative pattern stops at a position other than before or after the reach decorative pattern, ``reach except before or after'', and ``completely off'', in which reach does not occur. For example, C3=0 to 201 corresponds to a completely off reach, C3=202 to 208 corresponds to a reach that is out of front and back, and C3=209 to 238 corresponds to a reach that is not out of front and back. In addition, the content of the lottery (drawing of reach) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 depends on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or a high probability state, or if the fluctuation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40 is not activated. It may be set individually depending on whether it is active or active, how many balls are active and pending when the first symbol starts to fluctuate, and the like. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 17) described later), and is stored in the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b. The ball will be stored in the reserved ball storage area.

Further, among the three variation type counters CS1 to CS3, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of "0 to 198", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, "198") For example, the variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of "0 to 240", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "240"). For example, the variation type counter CS3 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of "0 to 162" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (ie, "162"). In the following description, the fluctuation type counter CS1 will also be referred to as the "first fluctuation type counter," the fluctuation type counter CS2 as the "second fluctuation type counter," and the fluctuation type counter CS3 as the "third fluctuation type counter," as appropriate. .

The first variation type counter CS1 determines a general variation pattern group of decorative symbols, such as the so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., of the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol), and the completely missed type. . Subsequently, one further variation pattern is determined by the second variation type counter CS2 from among the variation pattern group thus determined by the first variation type counter CS1.

The decorative pattern variation pattern is determined using the main decorative pattern variation pattern selection table shown in FIG.

That is, when the jackpot symbol counter C2 is any one of "0" to "39" and the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "20", the normal reach group (jackpot normal reach group) is determined, If it is "21" to "110" or "111" to "198", a super reach group (jackpot super reach group) is determined. If the jackpot symbol counter C2 is one of "46" to "85" and the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "20", the normal reach group (jackpot normal reach group) is determined, and "21 ” to “110” or “111” to “198”, a super reach group (jackpot super reach group) is determined. When the jackpot symbol counter C2 is one of "86" to "99" and the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", a super reach group (jackpot super reach group) is determined, If it is "101" to "198", another super reach group (jackpot super reach group) is determined. In this way, when winning a jackpot, the probability of selecting the super reach with a high jackpot expectation is set to be higher than the normal reach with a low jackpot expectation. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that it is easy to win a jackpot when the reach that the player has high expectations for is executed.

When the jackpot symbol counter C2 is one of "0" to "39", the detailed variation pattern type is determined as follows. If the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "20", and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "189", normal reach A (jackpot normal reach A) is determined, and the second variation If the type counter CS2 is between "190" and "240", normal reach B (jackpot normal reach B) is determined. In this way, the probability of jackpot normal reach A being selected is set to be overwhelmingly higher than jackpot normal reach B. As a result, if an effect is executed in which the pending display TH changes to a rainbow color in normal reach A, the player is made aware that the rainbow color of the pending display TH suggests a confirmed jackpot. It becomes easier.

Next, when the first variation type counter CS1 is "21" to "110", and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "189", super reach A (jackpot super reach A) is determined. If the second variation type counter CS2 is between "190" and "240", super reach B (jackpot super reach B) is determined. As a result, if a specific effect such as the pending display TH changing to a rainbow color is executed in Super Reach A, the game player recognizes that the rainbow color of the pending display TH suggests a confirmed jackpot. It becomes easier to give to others.

Furthermore, if the first variation type counter CS1 is "111" to "198", and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "80", super reach C (jackpot super reach C) is determined. , if the second variation type counter CS2 is "81" to "160", super reach D (jackpot super reach D) is determined, and if the second variation type counter CS2 is "161" to "240", super reach is determined. E (jackpot super reach E) is determined. As a result, in Super Reach C, for example, in the middle of the reach development performance, a performance is executed in which the pending display TH changes to a rainbow color, and in Super Reach D, for example, in the middle of the reach development performance, the relevant pending display TH changes to red. For example, if a performance is executed in which the hold display changes to a rainbow color at the final moment of the reach development performance in Super Reach E, the hold display TH changes in the middle of the reach development performance. Even if the color does not change to rainbow color or red, the reach performance can be shown to the player in a state where the player expects a jackpot until the last moment of the reach development performance.

Also when the jackpot symbol counter C2 is one of "46" to "85" or when the jackpot symbol counter C2 is one of "86" to "99", the jackpot symbol counter C2 mentioned above is "0". to "39".

Next, if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is between "0" and "201", it is determined that the stop pattern is completely off, and when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is between "202" and "208", it is determined that the stop pattern selection counter C3 is between "202" and "208". Either a lead or a super reach that is out of the front and back is determined, and if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is between "209" and "238", either a normal reach that is out of the front or back or a super reach that is out of the front or back is determined. . In this way, if the jackpot lottery is a loss, it is set so that it is likely to be a complete loss.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is one of "0" to "201", the detailed type of variation pattern is determined as follows. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", if the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", a complete deviation A is determined, and the second variation type counter CS2 is If it is "121" to "240", a completely missed B is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", if the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", a complete miss C is determined, and the second variation type counter CS2 is If it is "121" to "240", a complete failure D is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "151" to "198", if the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", a complete error E is determined, and the second variation type counter CS2 is If it is "121" to "240", a completely missed F is determined.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is one of "202" to "208", the detailed type of variation pattern is determined as follows. When the first variation type counter CS1 is from "0" to "100", and when the second variation type counter CS2 is from "0" to "120", the normal reach A is determined, and the second variation type counter CS2 If it is "121" to "240", normal reach B is determined. As a result, if an effect is executed in which the pending display remains white in normal reach A, and an effect is executed in which the pending display remains blue in normal reach B, the pending display remains white. If it does not change, it is difficult to expect a jackpot, and if the pending display changes to blue, it is easier to expect a jackpot than if it remains white, but the player is more likely to get the impression that the expectation of a jackpot is not high.

In addition, when the first variation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", super reach A is determined, and the second variation If the type counter CS2 is between "121" and "240", super reach B is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is between "151" and "198", and when the second variation type counter CS2 is between "0" and "50", a super reach C is determined and the second variation type counter If CS2 is between "51" and "240", super reach D is determined. As a result, if the pending display TH changes to blue in Super Reach A, B, and D, the expectation of a jackpot is not so high, but if you reach until the end of the symbol variation display as in Super Reach E, you can expect a jackpot. The performance can be shown to the players. In the super reach D, if the pending display TH changes to red, it becomes easier to show the reach effect while expecting a jackpot.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is one of "209" to "238", the detailed variation pattern type is that the stop pattern selection counter C3 is one of "202" to "208". Determined in the same way as the case.

The variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated once each time a normal process (described later) is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are acquired during the starting winning process.

Note that the size and range of each counter described above are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the jackpot random number counter C1, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a second symbol random number counter C4 is used to draw the second symbol on the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of, for example, "0" to "250" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (ie, 250). The second symbol random number counter C4 is updated regularly (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 17) to be described later), and is acquired when the game ball passes through the second starting port 34 on either the left or right side. There are 149 random number values that will win, and the range is from 5 to 153.

In particular, when the second symbol random number counter C4 completes one round, the initial value of the second symbol random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the second symbol random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. , are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing (see FIG. 14), which will be described later. The second symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 17) described later), and the second symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 17), which will be described later). 2 is stored in the symbol retention storage area.

In other words, the RAM 503 also has a second symbol holding storage area which is a separate area from the holding ball storage area, and includes one second symbol execution area and four second symbol holding areas (second A second symbol retention storage area is provided, which consists of symbol retention areas 1 to 4 (retention areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas has a number Each value of the two-symbol random number counter C4 is stored in chronological order.

In addition, the second symbol out-of-place symbol counter C5 is updated once every time the second symbol control process of the normal process in FIG. When the second symbol random number counter C4 is updated to the buffer and stored in the second symbol holding ball storage area, the second symbol random number counter C5, which is updated and acquired to the second symbol random number counter C4, is also updated to the second symbol random number counter C5. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, when the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is a failure, an "x" is drawn based on the value of the second symbol missing symbol counter C5 in the second symbol reserved ball storage area. The displayed display section 41b is displayed by lighting. Note that the second symbol variation display result may be performed based only on the second symbol random number counter C4 without providing the second symbol out-of-character symbol counter C5. In other words, if the second symbol random number counter C4 wins, the display section 41a with an "O" drawn on it lights up, and if it loses, the display section 41b with an "X" drawn on it lights up.

Next, a symbol variation display pattern selection table used in the display control device 45, which will be described later, will be explained with reference to FIG. The symbol fluctuation display pattern selection table is set so that once one fluctuation pattern is determined, one symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined. That is, the display control device 45 is configured to display the background in one symbol variation display pattern when a display variation pattern designation command indicating one variation pattern is transmitted from the sub-control device 262. .

When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be 8R normal jackpot normal reach A, B, symbol fluctuation display pattern 1 is determined. The symbol fluctuation display pattern 1 is set to display the main decorative symbol SZ at the start of the fluctuation, and is set to display the main decorative symbol SZ even during the reach display, and even when the fluctuation is confirmed, the jackpot combination is displayed with the main decorative symbol SZ. is set to display. That is, the symbol variation display pattern 1 allows the player to recognize that the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed during normal variation and normal reach display.

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach A, B, symbol variation display pattern 2 is determined. Symbol variation display pattern 2 is set to display the main decorative symbol SZ from the start of variation to the start of reach display, and then when the reach develops from the normal reach to the developed reach, the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed when the reach develops. It is set to change from to developed symbol HZ, and then it is set to display developed symbol HZ until the re-variation (final variation) is finished, and the result of the reach development effect with developed symbol HZ is a jackpot combination. is displayed, and when the change is confirmed, the main decorative pattern SZ is returned to display that it is a jackpot combination. Further, when the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach C, D, symbol variation display pattern 3 is determined. Symbol variation display pattern 3 is set to display the main decorative pattern SZ from the start of variation to the start of reach display, and then when the reach develops, the main decorative symbol SZ changes to the developed symbol HZ when the reach develops. After that, the development symbol HZ is set to be displayed until the second re-variation (final variation) is completed, and the development symbol HZ displays that the result of the reach development effect is a jackpot combination. After that, when the variation is confirmed, the system returns to the main decorative pattern SZ and the main decorative pattern SZ is set to display that it is a jackpot combination. Thereby, even if the main decorative pattern SZ changes to the developed pattern HZ during the ready-to-win display, the player can be made aware that the main decorative pattern SZ will be returned to when the change is confirmed.

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach E, symbol variation display pattern 4 is determined. Symbol variation display pattern 4 is set to display the main decorative symbol SZ from the start of variation to the start of reach display, and when the reach develops from the normal reach to the developed reach, the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed when the reach develops. It is set to change to the symbol HZ, and then it is set to display the developed symbol HZ until the second re-variation (final variation) is completed. In the final variation, the development pattern HZ displays that the result of the reach development performance is out of super reach, and then the main decorative pattern SZ is set to display that out of super reach. After the super reach miss is displayed in the main decorative pattern SZ, the pattern fluctuation by the developed pattern HZ is set to be restored. After the symbol variation by the developed symbol HZ is restored, the development symbol HZ is set to display that the ready-to-reach development effect will be a jackpot combination. After the jackpot combination is displayed on the developed symbol HZ, the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed as a jackpot combination. In this way, after the super reach out is displayed on the development symbol HZ in the final variation of the reach development effect, the super reach off is displayed on the main decorative symbol SZ before the symbol variation by the development symbol HZ is restored. Therefore, unlike the conventional re-fluctuation performance that simply displays the out-of-reach by the developed symbol HZ during the reach development performance and then revives the symbol fluctuation of the developed symbol HZ, a series of symbol fluctuation displays are displayed as a super reach. The pattern variation of the developed pattern HZ can be revived after the player is strongly impressed with the image that the game is confirmed by losing. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the revival performance in the symbol variation display.

When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a complete miss A to F, it is decided to display a miss in the symbol variation display pattern 8. The symbol variation display pattern 8 is set so that the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed from the start of the symbol variation display to its finalization without going through the reach display.

When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be normal reaches A and B, it is determined that the symbol fluctuation display pattern 5 is to be displayed. The symbol variation display pattern 5 is the same as the above-mentioned symbol variation display pattern 1 during full variation, but displays the losing combination by the decorative symbol SZ when displaying the result of the ready-to-win effect (at the time of confirmation). When it is determined that the super reach A or B is out of the order, it is decided to display the out of position in the symbol variation display pattern 6. Symbol variation display pattern 6 is the same as symbol variation display pattern 2 up to the pseudo series 1 in the reach development production, but in the final variation in the reach development production, it displays an out-of-reach combination by the developed symbol HZ, and when confirmed, the main decorative symbol Display out-of-reach combinations due to SZ. When it is decided that the super reach C or D is out of the order, it is decided to display the out of position in the symbol variation display pattern 7. Symbol variation display pattern 7 is the same as symbol variation display pattern 2 up to the pseudo series 2 in the reach development performance, but in the final variation in the reach development performance, it displays an out-of-reach combination by the developed symbol HZ, and when confirmed, the main decorative symbol Display out-of-reach combinations due to SZ. In particular, in symbol variation display patterns 6 and 7, if out of reach is displayed in the development symbol HZ in the final variation of the reach development effect, and out of reach is displayed in the main decorative symbol SZ at the time of confirmation, a series of symbol variation displays This gives the player a strong impression that the game has been determined by being out of reach. As a result, before the symbol variation due to the developed symbol HZ is restored in the above-mentioned symbol variation display pattern 4, the super reach miss is displayed in the main decorative symbol SZ. It is possible to give a strong impression to the player that the game has been decided even if it is out of reach. In addition, symbol fluctuation display patterns 6 and 7 display that the result of the reach development effect is out of reach, and until the final moment of the symbol fluctuation display when the out-of-reach combination with the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed, the development symbol HZ is displayed. A ready-to-win performance can be shown while maintaining expectations for a variation pattern like symbol variation display pattern 4 in which symbol variation is revived.

Next, a pending display pattern selection table used in the display control device 45, which will be described later, will be explained with reference to FIG. The pending display pattern selection table is set so that once one variation pattern is determined, one pending display pattern is determined. That is, the display control device 45 is configured to execute a pending display effect using one pending display pattern when a display variation pattern command indicating one variation pattern is transmitted from the sub-control device 262. In addition, the pending display pattern in 8R guaranteed variable jackpot normal reach A, B is the same as the pending display pattern in 8R normal jackpot normal reach A, B, and the pending display pattern in 8R guaranteed variable jackpot super reach A to E is 8R normal and 16R probable variable. This is the same as the pending display pattern in Jackpot Super Reach A to E. Below, the reservation display pattern in the 8R probability-variable jackpot will be explained.

When the variable display pattern is determined to be completely off, A to D, a pending display pattern 8 is set. In the pending display pattern 8, the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4 are set to display white, and the pending display TH is set to display white from the start of variation due to the main decorative pattern SZ to the confirmation of the variation. Ru. This suggests that the pending display pattern 8 has no possibility of becoming a jackpot if the pending display TH displays white from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation.

When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be 8R normal jackpot normal reach A, pending display pattern 1 is determined. The pending display pattern 1 is set to display white in the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, and is set to display rainbow colors at the start of fluctuation of the main decorative pattern SZ in the pending display TH. . As a result, the pending display pattern 1 easily indicates to the player that a jackpot is confirmed when the pending display TH changes to a rainbow color when the main decorative symbol SZ starts to fluctuate. When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be 8R normal jackpot normal reach B, pending display pattern 2 is determined. The pending display pattern 2 is set to display white in the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, and is set to change from white to blue in the corresponding pending display TH when the main decorative pattern SZ starts changing. There is. As a result, the pending display pattern 2 may result in a jackpot if the pending display TH changes to blue when the main decorative pattern SZ starts to fluctuate, but there is a possibility that it will become a jackpot if the pending display TH remains blue. It becomes easier to suggest to the player that the amount is small.

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach A, a pending display pattern 3 is determined. The pending display pattern 3 is set to display white in the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, and in the corresponding pending display TH, the first re-variation by the developed symbol HZ ends from the start of variation of the main decorative pattern SZ. The color is set to be displayed in white up to the point in time, and the color is set to be displayed in rainbow color at the start of the second re-variation (final variation) by the developed pattern HZ. As a result, the hold display pattern 3 easily indicates to the player that a jackpot is confirmed when the hold display TH changes to a rainbow color at the start of the second re-variation (final change) in the reach development performance. When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach B, a pending display pattern 4 is determined. The pending display pattern 4 is set to display white in the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, and in the pending display TH, white is displayed from the start of variation until the first re-variation by the developed symbol HZ is completed. It is set to display blue color at the start of the second re-variation (final variation) by the developed symbol HZ. As a result, the pending display pattern 4 may become a jackpot if the pending display TH changes to blue at the start of the second re-variation (final variation) in the reach development effect, but if the pending display TH changes to blue. It becomes easy to suggest to the player that there is a small possibility of winning the jackpot if the game is left as is.

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach C, pending display pattern 5 is determined. The pending display pattern 5 is set to display blue color, which has a higher jackpot expectation level than white, in the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, and in the corresponding pending display TH, the developed symbol is displayed from the start of fluctuation by the main decorative symbol SZ. It is set to display blue until the second re-variation (Pseudo-Run 2) by HZ ends, and it is set to change from blue to rainbow color at the start of the third re-variation (final variation) by the developed pattern HZ. ing. As a result, in the hold display pattern 5, the first to fourth hold displays H1 to H4, which are hold displays before the start of fluctuation, are blue, and the hold display is blue at the start of the third re-change (final change) in the reach development effect. The fact that the display TH changes to a rainbow color can indicate to the player that a jackpot is certain. When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach D, a pending display pattern 6 is determined. The pending display pattern 6 is set to display blue in the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, and in the pending display TH, the second re-variation ( The color is set to be displayed in blue until the pseudo series 2) ends, and it is set to change from blue to red at the start of the third re-variation (final variation) by the developed symbol HZ. As a result, in the pending display pattern 6, the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, which are pending displays before the start of variation, are blue, and the pending display is displayed at the start of the third re-variation (final variation) by the developed symbol HZ. If TH changes to red, it can be suggested to the player that there is a possibility of a jackpot.

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach E, pending display pattern 7 is determined. The pending display pattern 7 is set to display blue in the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, and in the pending display TH, the third re-variation ( It is set to display blue until a super reach miss is displayed in the developed symbol HZ in the final variation), and after the super reach miss is displayed by the developed symbol HZ in the final variation of the reach development effect, the main decorative symbol SZ It is set to display a rainbow color from the start of the super reach off display. As a result, the pending display pattern 7 is a color that suggests that there is a low possibility that the pending display TH will become a jackpot combination until the end of the display indicating that the result of the reach development effect by the development symbol HZ is out of reach. Even in the case, the result of the reach development effect by the development symbol HZ is displayed as being out of reach, and the display is displayed as in hold display pattern 7 until the last moment of the symbol variation display when the combination of out of reach by the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed. It is possible to show a reach effect while maintaining the expectation that a pending change (a change that suggests a fluctuation revival) will occur.

When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be normal reach A, the hold display pattern 8 is determined. The hold display pattern 8 is set to display white in the first to fourth hold displays H1 to H4, and is set to display white in the hold display TH from the start of variation to the time of confirmation. Thereby, in the hold display pattern 8, the hold display TH does not change from white at all, so if the hold display TH remains white during the ready-to-reach display, it can give the player the impression that he is out. When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be normal reach B, the above-mentioned pending display pattern 2 is determined. In other words, the pending display pattern 2 tends to suggest to the player that the possibility of winning the jackpot is small if the pending display TH simply changes to blue when the main decorative symbol SZ starts changing.

When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be super reach A, the above-mentioned hold display pattern 4 is determined. In other words, with the pending display pattern 4, if the blue color is displayed at the start of the second re-variation (final variation) due to the developed symbol HZ, it may become a jackpot, but the possibility of that is small (with the pending display pattern 2) It merely suggests to the player that they can expect a bigger win than if they had been set. When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be super reach B, the suspension display pattern 9 is determined. The pending display pattern 9 is set to display white in the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, and in the corresponding pending display TH, it changes to blue at the start of the variation, and the second re-variation (final variation) due to the developed symbol. ) is set to display blue when starting, and also set to display blue when finalizing. As a result, the pending display pattern 9 only displays blue at the start of the second re-variation (final variation) due to the developed symbol HZ, so a jackpot can only be slightly expected.

When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be super reach C, the above-mentioned hold display pattern 6 is determined. The pending display pattern 6 may also be set in the jackpot super reach D described above. There are more cases where super reach D is set when a jackpot is achieved than when super reach C is set when the player is out of the order. As a result, in the pending display pattern 6, the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, which are pending displays before the start of variation, are blue, and the pending display pattern 6 is blue at the start of the third re-variation (final variation) by the developed symbol HZ. If the display TH changes to red, it can be suggested to the player that there are more cases of a jackpot than in the above-mentioned pending display patterns 2, 4, 8, and 9.

When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be super reach D, the suspension display pattern 10 is determined. The pending display pattern 10 is set to display blue in the first to fourth pending displays, and in the pending display TH, from the start of variation due to the main decorative pattern SZ to the third re-variation (final variation) due to the developed symbol HZ. It is set to display a super reach out with the developed symbol HZ, and to display blue until the out of reach combination with the main decorative symbol SZ is determined. The pending display pattern 10 is the same as the above-mentioned pending display pattern 7 until the final change, but the pending display pattern 10 displays the result of the reach development effect by the main decorative symbol SZ that is out of reach. At the time when the combination of out-of-reach by decorative pattern SZ is displayed, the pending display TH displays blue, whereas the pending display pattern 7 indicates that the result of the reach development effect by main decorative pattern SZ is out-of-reach. The difference is that after , the pending display changes to a rainbow color at the time when the out-of-reach combination with the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed. As a result, the pending display pattern 10 is set to display blue in the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, and in the pending display TH, from the start of variation due to the main decorative symbol SZ to the third time due to the developed symbol HZ. Even if the pending display TH displays blue until the Super Reach Out is displayed on the developed symbol HZ in the re-variation (final variation), the end of the symbol variation display in which the combination of the Main Decorative Symbol SZ and the Out of Reach is displayed. The ready-to-reach effect can be shown while maintaining the expectation that a pending change like the pending display pattern 7 will occur until the moment of .

Next, a background display pattern selection table used in the display control device 45, which will be described later, will be explained with reference to FIG. 11. The background display pattern selection table shown in FIG. 11 is set so that when one variation pattern is determined, one background display pattern is determined. That is, the display control device 45 is configured to execute background display using one background display pattern when a display variation pattern command indicating one variation pattern is transmitted from the sub-control device 262. Note that the background display pattern selection table may be set such that one background display pattern selected by lottery from among a plurality of background display patterns is determined for one variation pattern. In the following, the variation pattern of the 8R probability variable jackpot will be explained, but the same applies to the variation pattern of the 8R normal jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R normal jackpot normal reach A, B, background display pattern 1 is determined. Background display pattern 1 is set to display the normal background at the start of variation by the main decorative pattern SZ, and is set to display the normal background even during the reach display by the main decorative pattern SZ, and the jackpot combination by the main decorative pattern SZ. The normal background is also set to be displayed when the image is confirmed. In other words, the background display pattern 1 allows the player to recognize that when the variation due to the main decorative pattern SZ starts, the game starts with the normal background, and when the variation due to the main decorative pattern SZ is finalized, it ends with the normal background.

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach A, B, background display pattern 2 is determined. Background display pattern 2 is set to display the normal background from the start of variation by the main decorative pattern SZ until the start of the reach display, and after that, when the reach develops from the normal reach to the developed reach, the reach by the developed symbol HZ. At the start of the development display, it is set so that it changes from the normal background to development background A if it is a jackpot super reach A, and to development background B if it is a jackpot super reach B, and then changes again due to the development symbol HZ (final variation) The development background A or B is set to be displayed until the end of the development pattern, and after the background indicating that the reach development effect will result in a jackpot is displayed on the development background A or B when the jackpot combination by the development symbol HZ is displayed, It is set to return to the normal background when the jackpot combination is determined by the main decorative pattern SZ.

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach C, D, background display pattern 3 is determined. Background display pattern 3 is set to display the normal background from the start of variation by the main decorative pattern SZ until the start of the reach display, and then from the normal background to the start of the reach development display by the main development pattern HZ. If it is reach C, it is set to change to development background C, and if it is jackpot super reach D, it is set to change to development background D, and after that, it is set to change to development background C or development background until the second re-variation (final variation) by development symbol HZ is completed. D is set to be displayed, and after the development background C or D is displayed indicating that the reach development effect will result in a jackpot when the jackpot combination with the development symbol HZ is displayed, the jackpot combination with the decorative symbol SZ is displayed. It is set to return to the normal background when confirmed. As a result, even if the background display patterns 2 and 3 change from the normal background to the developed background during the reach display, they will start from the normal background when the change due to the main decorative pattern SZ starts, and when the change due to the main decorative pattern SZ is confirmed, the background display pattern will be the normal background. The player can be made aware that the game will return to .

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach E, background display pattern 4 is determined. Background display pattern 4 is set to display the normal background from the start of fluctuation by the main decorative symbol SZ until the start of the reach display, and thereafter, when the reach development display by the developed symbol HZ starts, the jackpot super reach D is displayed from the normal background. It is set to change to the same development background D as the outgoing super reach D, and then it is set to display the development background D until the second re-variation (final variation) by the development symbol HZ is completed, and the development background D is set to be displayed until the development pattern HZ finishes the second re-variation (final variation). When displaying an out-of-reach combination with development background D, a background indicating that the result of the reach development effect will be out of reach is displayed, and then it is set to return to the normal background when displaying an out-of-reach combination with main decorative pattern SZ. It is set to display a background for a revival effect indicating that the symbol variation due to the developed symbol HZ will be revived when the symbol variation due to the developed symbol HZ is revived, and the result of the symbol variation after the revival due to the developed symbol HZ is a jackpot combination. When displaying this, it is set to display a background for the resurrection effect indicating that the result of symbol variation after the revival by the developed symbol HZ will be a jackpot result. Then, it is set to return to the normal background when the jackpot combination using the main decorative pattern SZ is determined. In this way, in the development background display of the final variation of the reach development effect, after the background indicating that the result of the reach development effect is out of reach is displayed, a resurrection effect indicating that the symbol variation due to the development symbol HZ will be revived is displayed. Before the background is displayed, it is set to return to the normal background that is displayed when an out-of-reach combination is confirmed, so you can simply confirm that the result of the reach development performance is out of reach within the reach development performance. Unlike the background display in conventional re-variation effects, where a background for a revival effect indicating that the symbol variation due to the developed symbol HZ will be revived is displayed after displaying the background indicated by the developed symbol HZ, even if the background display is viewed, After strongly impressing the player with the image that the fluctuation display has been finalized by being out of the super reach, the player can be shown a background for a revival performance indicating that the symbol fluctuation by the developed symbol HZ will be revived. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the background display accompanying the revival effect in the symbol variation display.

When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be normal reaches A and B, the background display pattern 1 is determined as in the case where the above-mentioned 8R normal jackpot normal reaches A and B are determined. If it is decided that the super reaches A to D are out of the order, it is decided to display the background in background display patterns 2 and 3, similar to the case that the above-mentioned 8R or 16R probability variable jackpot super reach A to D is decided. . In particular, in the out-of-reach super reach A to D, a background indicating that the result of the reach development effect will be out of reach is displayed in the development background in the final variation of the reach development effect, and when the out-of-reach combination is confirmed by the main decorative pattern SZ, Since it returns to the background, even when looking at the background display, the player is strongly impressed with the image that the series of symbol fluctuation displays have been determined by being out of super reach. As a result, the background returns to the normal background that is displayed when an out-of-reach combination is confirmed, before the background for the revival effect indicating that the symbol variation due to the developed symbol HZ is revived in the above-mentioned jackpot super reach E is displayed. By displaying this, it is possible to make a stronger impression on the player that the series of symbol variation displays have been determined by being out of super reach.

Next, a sound output pattern selection table used in the display control device 45, which will be described later, will be described with reference to FIG. 12. The sound output pattern selection table is set so that when one variation pattern is determined, one sound output pattern is determined. That is, when the display variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of 1 is transmitted from the sub-control device 262, the display control device 45 outputs the sound during the variation display of the decorative pattern using the sound output pattern of 1. It is composed of Note that the sound output pattern selection table may be set such that one sound output pattern selected by lottery from among a plurality of sound output patterns is determined for one variation pattern. Further, the sound output pattern may be set in association with the background display pattern described above. The sounds output according to the sound output pattern include sounds such as sound effects, music, and human voices.

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R normal jackpot normal reach A, B, sound output pattern 1 is determined. Sound output pattern 1 is set to output normal music at the start of variation due to the main decorative pattern SZ, and is set to output normal music even during the reach display by the main decorative pattern SZ, and is set to output normal music when fluctuation is started by the main decorative pattern SZ. When the jackpot is confirmed, jackpot music is set to be output to notify the jackpot confirmation. In other words, in sound output pattern 1, normal music is output during normal reach from the start of fluctuation by the main decorative pattern SZ, and when a jackpot combination is determined by the main decorative pattern SZ, a jackpot confirmation sound (for example, music congratulating the jackpot or "Congratulations") is output. It is possible to give the player the recognition that a voice congratulating him on a jackpot (such as a voice congratulating him on a jackpot) will be output. Normal music is music that excites the game during normal fluctuations or during display of the standby screen. By separating the normal music between fluctuating display and non-fluctuation display, the player may be able to audibly distinguish between fluctuating display and non-fluctuation display.

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach A, B, sound output pattern 2 is determined. Audio output pattern 2 is set to display normal music in accordance with the normal background from the start of variation due to the main decorative pattern SZ until the start of reach display, and then when the reach develops from normal reach display to developed reach. , At the start of the reach development display by the development symbol HZ, from the normal music, if the jackpot super reach A, the development music A for the reach development performance corresponding to the super reach A, and if the jackpot super reach B, the corresponding super reach B. It is set to change to development music B for reach development production corresponding to , and then it is set to output development music A or B until the re-variation (final variation) due to development symbol HZ is finished, and development music A or B is output until development symbol HZ finishes. When the jackpot combination is displayed, the jackpot notification sound that indicates that the result of the reach development performance is a jackpot with development music A or B (for example, if the reach development performance is a battle performance, the sound effect that plays when an ally character wins) , music, decisive lines of ally characters, voices shouting victory, etc.), and when a jackpot combination is confirmed by the main decorative pattern SZ, a jackpot confirmation sound is output.

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach C, D, sound output pattern 3 is determined. Sound output pattern 3 is set to display normal music from the start of variation by the main decorative pattern SZ until the start of the reach display, and then, when the reach develops from the normal reach display to the developed reach, the sound output pattern 3 is set to display normal music by the developed symbol HZ. At the start of the reach development display, from the normal music, if it is a jackpot super reach C, it will be changed to the development music C for reach development performance corresponding to the super reach C, and if it is a jackpot super reach D, it will be the reach development corresponding to the super reach D. It is set to change to the development music D for production, and then it is set to output the development music C or D until the second re-variation (final variation) by the development symbol HZ is finished, and the jackpot by the development symbol HZ. After outputting a jackpot notification sound indicating that the result of the reach development performance is a jackpot with development music C or D when the combination is displayed, a jackpot confirmation sound will be output when the jackpot combination is confirmed by the main decorative pattern SZ. It is set. As a result, even if the normal music changes from normal music to developed music A to D when the normal reach with the main decorative pattern SZ develops into the super reach with the developed pattern HZ, a jackpot confirmation sound is output when the jackpot combination with the main decorative pattern SZ is confirmed. It is possible to give the player the recognition that the game will be played.

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach E, sound output pattern 4 is determined. Sound output pattern 4 is set to display normal music from the start of fluctuation by the main decorative pattern SZ until the start of the reach display, and then, when the reach develops from the normal reach display to the developed reach, the sound output pattern 4 is set to display normal music by the developed pattern HZ. It is set so that when reach develops, the normal music changes to super reach D and the same development music D as out-of-reach super reach D, and after that, development music D is output until the second re-variation (final variation) by development symbol HZ is finished. When the out-of-reach combination is displayed by the development symbol HZ, the out-of-reach notification sound indicating that the result of the out-of-reach development effect is out of reach with the development music D (for example, a sound effect indicating that an ally character will lose) , voice, music, lines such as "I'm sorry") are output, and when the main decorative symbol SZ displays an out-of-reach combination, the development music will be played once, similar to when the out-of-reach combination is confirmed by the main decorative symbol SZ, which will be described later. After the output of the normal music is resumed, when the symbol variation due to the developed symbol HZ is revived, the revival music indicating that the symbol variation due to the developed symbol HZ is revived is output, and the jackpot combination due to the developed symbol HZ is displayed. When the jackpot combination is determined by the main decorative pattern SZ, the jackpot confirmation sound is set to be output. In this way, after the out-of-reach notification sound is output in the development music output of the final variation of the reach development effect, and before the revival music is output, the development music is temporarily stopped in the same way as when the out-of-reach is confirmed by the main decorative symbol SZ. (Additionally, the output of normal music is restarted), and a series of symbol fluctuation displays are confirmed in the sound output when the super reach is off (Furthermore, the output of normal music is restarted, After making a strong impression on the player that the game has moved to a standby screen, the revival music can be played to the player. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the sound output accompanying the revival performance in the symbol variation display.

If the fluctuation pattern is determined to be normal reach A or B, the normal music is output from the start of the fluctuation due to the main decorative pattern SZ while the normal reach is displayed, and the normal music is stopped when the out of reach due to the main decorative pattern SZ is confirmed. Sound output pattern 5 is determined. If it is determined that Super Reach A to D is out of the front or back, normal music is output during the normal reach display from the start of variation by the main decorative symbol SZ, and when the reach develops from the normal reach display to the developed reach display, the developed symbol HZ It is set so that the normal music changes from the normal music to developed music A to D when the reach develops with When an out-of-reach combination is displayed by HZ, sound output patterns 6 and 7 for stopping the advanced music A to D are determined. When it is determined that the main decorative pattern SZ is completely off, normal music is output during the variation due to the main decorative pattern SZ, and a sound output pattern 8 is determined in which the normal music is stopped when the main decorative pattern SZ is confirmed to be off. In particular, in the out-of-reach super reach A to D, an out-of-reach notification sound indicating that the result of the reach development effect is out of reach is output together with the development music A to D in the sound output at the final variation of the reach development effect, and the main decorative pattern SZ Since the developing music is stopped as when the out-of-reach combination is determined by , even when listening to the audio output, the player is strongly impressed with the image that the series of symbol variation displays have been determined due to the out-of-reach combination. As a result, before the resurrection music is output in the above-mentioned jackpot Super Reach E, providing a period for stopping the output of the developing music, such as when the out-of-reach combination is confirmed, will further improve the ability of the series of symbol fluctuations to be displayed in the Super Reach E. It is possible to strongly impress the player with the image that a loss is confirmed.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 13 to 20. The processing of the CPU 501 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a 2 msec cycle in this embodiment), and power failure to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of a signal, and for convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt process, the start-up winning process that is executed in the timer interrupt process, the look-ahead lottery process that is executed in the start-up winning process, and The NMI interrupt processing will be explained, and then the main processing will be explained.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 17, first in step S601, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, it reads the states of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

After that, in step S602, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("599" in this embodiment), it is cleared to "0", and the initial value second symbol random number counter is incremented. CINI2 is incremented by one and cleared to "0" when the counter value is incremented by one after reaching the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 6).

In the subsequent step S603, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum values (in this embodiment, "599", "9", and "9", respectively). Each increment by one after reaching "250") is cleared to "0". Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 6).

After that, in step S604, a starting prize winning process is executed in response to a winning to the first starting hole 33a and the second starting hole 33b. This starting winning process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 18, which will be described later.

After that, in step S605, a firing control process is executed. Specifically, in the firing control process, as shown in FIG. 4, when the firing permission signal S7 from the firing control device 312 is ON, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 controls the firing control signal S8 and the ball feeding control. The signal S9 is output to the firing control device 312, and the game ball firing control by the firing device 229 is performed. After performing the firing control process in this manner, the CPU 501 temporarily ends this timer interrupt process.

The starting winning process performed by the main control device 261 will be described with reference to FIG. 18.

In step S701, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b based on the detection information of the operating port switch. If the player has won a prize, the process advances to step S702; if not, the process ends.

In step S702, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the number N of balls on hold in the first symbol display device 40 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the number N of pending active balls is less than the upper limit value, the process advances to step S703, and if not, the process ends. In step S703, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 increments the number N of pending balls by one. In step S704, the main controller 261 converts the number of active pending balls N incremented in step S703 into a reserved ball storage area designation command, and outputs it to the sub-control device 262 together with a look-ahead variation pattern designation command to be described later. Set to .

In step S705, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 acquires random numbers related to determining the win/loss of the first symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the third symbol. Specifically, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot symbol counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 updated in step S603 are stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. The storage area is stored in the first area of the vacant areas of the first to fourth reservation areas.

In step S706, the main control device 261 executes a look-ahead lottery process that is performed prior to the fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 16 described above.

The prefetch lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 19.

In step S711, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a pre-read lottery to determine whether or not it is a jackpot at the time of storage based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not the result of the look-ahead lottery is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the current mode (probability variable state or normal state). The winning value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is as described above.

In step S712, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the result of the pre-read lottery is a jackpot, the CPU 501 selects the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. Decide which one to use.

In step S713, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance a fluctuation pattern (jackpot performance pattern) at the time of a jackpot. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 checks the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 in that order, similarly to the fluctuation start process described above. and determine the fluctuation pattern in advance.

When it is determined in step S711 that the result of the pre-read lottery is not a jackpot, in step S714, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the result of the pre-read lottery to a stop symbol that is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol.

In step S715, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance a variation pattern at the time of deviation (deviation effect pattern), and sets the deviation variation pattern in the variation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 checks the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 in that order, and determines the variation pattern. Decide in advance.

In step S716, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the addition of the performance time, that is, determines in advance the addition of the performance time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S713 or the loss variation pattern determined in step S715. . More specifically, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, the performance time increases due to the decorative pattern (third pattern) of the medium decorative pattern row on the third pattern display device 42 sliding to a stop (the corresponding medium decoration A variation pattern including an increase in the time it takes for the decorative symbols in the symbol row to slide and stop and be displayed is determined in advance.

In step S717, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 issues a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern determined in advance in step S713 or a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the losing variation pattern determined in step S505. Set.

In step S718, if the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed through steps S712 and S713, the jackpot symbol ("first specific winning symbol", "second If a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to a "specific winning symbol" or "non-specific winning symbol" is set and steps S714 and S715 have been passed, the first symbol display device 40 determined in advance in step S714 is Set the decorative design designation command corresponding to the design.

In step S719, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a performance time addition designation command corresponding to the performance time addition determined in advance in step S716, and ends this process.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to occurrence of a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off to be stored in the backup area of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal S1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. The NMI interrupt process in FIG. 20 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main controller 261. For a predetermined time after the power outage signal S1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the main controller 261 can be executed, and the NMI interrupt processing is executed within this predetermined time.

In the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 20, in step S801, power-off occurrence information is set in a backup area. In this embodiment, a flag is set for information on the occurrence of power outage, and the information is stored in the backup area.

Next, the main processing performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be explained.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261, and this main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes initial setting processing upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. In addition, in step S102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 waits for about 1 second, for example, for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operational. Execute. In the following step S103, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 permits RAM access.

Thereafter, data backup processing is executed regarding the RAM 503 within the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power monitoring board 261b is pressed down (ON), and if it is OFF, the process advances to step S105; If so, the process advances to step S113. In the subsequent step S105, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether the power-off occurrence information flag is set). Further, in step S106, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates a RAM judgment value, and in the subsequent step S107, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off. In other words, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 are correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process moves to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S113, etc.). In addition, if power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the used RAM area is cleared and the RAM 503 initialization process (step S113 etc.). That is, in step S113, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 clears the used area of the RAM 503 to "0" and executes the initialization process of the RAM 503.

In the following step S114, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout initialization command. In this way, the payout initialization command is output to the payout control device 311 when the main control device 261 is initialized.

Further, in step S115, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a power-on command to the sub-control board 262a. Since this power-on command includes a command for determining the model of the pachinko machine, the model can be determined on the sub side such as the sub-control board 262a or the display control device 45 based on the content of the command. .

Further, in step S116, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes initial setting of a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit). In step S117, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt permission, and shifts to normal processing (see FIG. 14), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, on the condition that the power-off occurrence information is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, when the power is restored, Execute processing (processing at power-off recovery). That is, in step S108, the power-off occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout return command to the payout control device 311, and instructs the payout control device 311 to start payout control. Although details will be described later, when the payout control device 311 receives a payout return command from the main control device 261, it returns and starts payout control.

In step S110, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sends a command to cause the sub-side control device to return to the gaming state at the time of power-off. /Timer Circuit). Furthermore, in step S112, interrupt permission is set, and the process then proceeds to normal processing (see FIG. 14), which will be described later. For example, even if a power outage occurs during normal processing, the power will be turned off after the last step of the normal processing (the "RAM access prohibited" step shown in Figure 14) is executed, so after the power is restored, is executed from step S201, which is the first step of normal processing.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S210 and S211 is executed in the remaining time.

In FIG. 14, first, in step S201, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs an external output process of transmitting output data such as commands updated in the previous process to each sub-side control device. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball payout command corresponding to the number of acquired game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 311. Further, in conjunction with the first symbol fluctuation display of the first symbol display device 40 (the fluctuation display of the first segment display section 40a), the third symbol display device 42 also performs a fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (third symbol). However, when the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 40, a variable pattern designation command, a decorative design designation command, a full stop command (confirmation command), etc. are transmitted to the sub-control device 262 in external output processing.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, when the first symbol starts to fluctuate, the external output of normal processing is performed in the order of fluctuation pattern designation command → production command (command for designating change of fluctuation time, etc.) → decorative symbol designation command. A predetermined number (for example, three) of commands are sent each time a process is performed (that is, three every 4 msec), and an all-stop command is sent at the timing of a variable time elapse. In addition, after the first symbol starts to fluctuate, a predetermined number (for example, 3) are output each time the external output processing of the normal process is performed in the order of fluctuation pattern designation command → production command → decorative design designation command (i.e., 3 every 4 msec). ) command may be sent, and the all-stop command may be sent at the timing of a variable time elapse.

The variation pattern designation command is a command for specifying the variation pattern of the decorative pattern (third pattern) that is variably displayed on the third pattern display device 42. The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and from the sub-control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 to display and execute the variation pattern of decorative symbols based on the transmitted variation pattern designation command.

The decorative symbol designation command is used to specify whether the variable display performance of the decorative symbol (third symbol) on the third symbol display device 42 will be a 16R probability variable jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, an 8R normal jackpot, or a miss. It is a command. The decorative design designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and from the sub-control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device so that the display result of the fluctuating pattern of the decorative symbols becomes the result (16R definite strange jackpot, 8R sure strange jackpot, 8R normal jackpot) according to the sent decorative symbol designation command. Display control of 42 is performed.

The all stop command is a command for instructing to stop the variation pattern of decorative symbols (third symbols) that are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The all-stop command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and from the sub-control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 to stop displaying the fluctuating patterns of decorative symbols based on the transmitted all-stop command.

In addition, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sends a variation pattern designation command and a production command (a command for specifying a change in variation time, etc.) to the sub-control device 262 in the external output process (step S201) of the normal process. I may send it. That is, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, it is determined which time is to be added to the variation time (the additional time due to the sliding effect of the decorative pattern described above), and such addition time is appropriately sent to the sub-control device 262. Direction commands are used to give instructions. Therefore, after the first symbol starts to fluctuate, a predetermined number (for example, 3) are output each time the external output process is performed in the normal process in the order of fluctuation pattern designation command → performance command → decorative design designation command (i.e., 3 at every 4 msec). ) command is sent, and an all-stop command may be sent at varying timing.

Next, in step S202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 updates the variation type counters CS1 to CS3. Specifically, each of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 is incremented by 1, and each increment of 1 after the counter value reaches the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment) is set to "0". ” to be cleared. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG.

In the subsequent step S203 of FIG. 14, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the prize ball count signal, the payout abnormality signal, and the lower tray full signal received from the payout control device 311. After that, in step S204, a first symbol variation process is executed to perform a variable display of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40. Through this first symbol variation processing, jackpot determination and setting of the first symbol variation pattern are performed. However, details of the first symbol variation process will be described later.

After that, in step S205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes a big winning hole opening/closing process for opening or closing the big winning hole 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the case of a jackpot state. That is, the big winning hole 32a is opened every round in the jackpot state, and for each round, it is checked whether the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 32a has elapsed or whether a specified number of game balls have entered the big winning hole 32a. judge. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the opening of the big prize opening 32a in that round is stopped and closed, and if there are remaining rounds, the opening of the big winning hole 32a is repeatedly executed for the number of remaining rounds.

Moreover, in step S206, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 41. Briefly, on the condition that the game ball passes through the second starting port 34, the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired each time, and the second symbol random number counter C4 is displayed on the display sections 41a and 41b of the second symbol display device 41. A variable display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the second symbol is drawn according to the value of the second symbol random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in a winning state, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 selects the second symbol on the lower side as shown in step S207. A second starting port 33b opening process is performed to open the starting port 33b for a predetermined period of time. Although the explanation is omitted, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 17, like the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. ing.

Further, in step S208, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether the power-off occurrence information flag is set). If the power-off occurrence information is not set, the process advances to step S209, and if the power-off occurrence information is set, the process advances to step S212.

Thereafter, in step S209, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the initial value random number counter CINI1, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are repeatedly updated (steps S210, S211 ). That is, in step S210, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and cleared to "0" when the counter value is incremented by one after reaching the maximum value ("599" in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. Similarly, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when incremented by 1 after the counter value reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, 250). do. Then, the updated value of the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Furthermore, in step S211, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated (same as step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and the value is incremented by 1 after the counter values reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, "198", "240", and "162"). Clear each to "0" when the time comes. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S207 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) and the initial value The value of the second symbol random number counter CINI2 (ie, the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4) can be updated randomly.

Further, in step S208, if power-off occurrence information is set and the process advances to step S212, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 sets interrupt prohibition. Subsequently, in step S213, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been quickly cut off to other control devices. Subsequently, in step S214, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops outputting the control signal. Subsequently, in step S215, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates the RAM judgment value and stores it in the backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Subsequently, in step S216, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 prohibits RAM access. After that, it enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

Next, the first symbol variation process in step S204 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15.

In FIG. 15, in step S401, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not there is currently a jackpot. Incidentally, during the jackpot, the period during the special game displayed on the third symbol display device 42 at the time of the jackpot and during the predetermined time after the end of the special game is included. In the following step S402, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol display device 40 is currently displaying the first symbol in a variable manner. Then, if the jackpot is not in progress and the first symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the process advances to step S403, and the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether the number of pending balls N of the first symbol display device 40 is greater than "0" or not. Determine whether or not. At this time, if there is a jackpot or if the number of pending balls N is "0", the process is immediately terminated.

Further, if neither the jackpot nor the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the number of pending balls N>0, the process advances to step S404. In step S404, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 subtracts "1" from the number N of pending balls. In step S405, processing for shifting the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the pending ball storage area to the execution area side, such as the first pending area → the execution area, the second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

After that, in step S406, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes a fluctuation start process. Here, to explain the fluctuation start process in detail using the flowchart of FIG. 16, in step S501, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 changes the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. Based on this, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or not. Specifically, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the mode at the time (whether it is a variable probability state or a normal state), and as mentioned above, in normal low probability cases, Among the numbers "0" to "599" of the jackpot random number counter C1, "150,450" is the winning value (2 pieces), and when the probability is high, "50,150,350,450" is the winning value (4 pieces). be.

When the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that it is a jackpot, in step S502, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, that is, the first symbol display One of the first to third symbols to be displayed on the first segment display section 40a of the device 40 is determined. That is, based on the table (not shown) representing the correspondence between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the symbols, the jackpot symbols ("first specific winning symbol", "second specific winning symbol", "second specific winning symbol", "first specific winning symbol", "second specific winning symbol", ``Symbol'' or ``Non-specific winning pattern'').

Next, in step S503, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a fluctuation pattern (jackpot performance pattern) at the time of a jackpot. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 inputs the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 without using the stop pattern selection counter C3. Check them in order and determine the fluctuation pattern.

In other words, based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, whether the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is displayed in “stop pattern 3” for a normal jackpot (non-specific hit) or whether the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is It is determined whether the decorative pattern is to be displayed in "stop pattern 4" with a probability-variable jackpot (specific win). The type of "stop pattern 3" or "stop pattern 4" thus determined is further determined based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, a rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols is determined, such as the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and the like. Subsequently, one variation pattern is determined from among the rough decorative pattern variation patterns determined in this way based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, a more detailed decorative pattern may be created, such as setting the elapsed time until the final stop decorative pattern (medium decorative pattern in this embodiment) stops after a reach occurs as a predetermined time. Determine the variation mode. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the following relationships, that is, the relationship between the numerical value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the numerical value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern, and the numerical value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 The relationship with the stop symbol time is predefined by a jackpot table or the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that it is not a jackpot, in step S504, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 displays a missed symbol, that is, the first segment display section 40a of the first symbol display device 40 with the fourth symbol. Set the stop symbol to display the stop symbol.

Next, in step S505, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a variation pattern at the time of deviation (deviation effect pattern), and sets the deviation variation pattern as a variation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 checks the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 in that order, and determines the variation pattern. decide.

That is, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, after the reach of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 occurs, the final stop decorative symbol is shifted by one position before and after the reach decorative symbol and stops. ", "Stop pattern 1" is a "reach other than the front and back", in which the final stop decorative pattern stops at a position other than before and after the reach decorative pattern after a reach occurs, and "stop pattern 2" is a "reach other than the front and back", and "completely off" in which a reach does not occur. ”, which is “stop pattern 0”, is determined. For example, if the determined stop pattern is "stop pattern 1" which is a reach that is out of front and back, normal reach, super reach, A rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols is determined, such as a variation pattern in which the reach type of a decorative symbol (third symbol) such as , etc. is specified. It is assumed here that normal reach is determined. Subsequently, one further variation pattern is determined from the group of normal reach variation patterns of the general decorative symbols determined in this way based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, a more detailed decorative pattern may be created, such as setting the elapsed time until the final stop decorative pattern (medium decorative pattern in this embodiment) stops after a reach occurs as a predetermined time. Determine the variation mode. In addition, the following relationships in the case of failure, that is, the relationship between the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern, and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 The relationship between each symbol and the stop symbol time is predefined by a table for losing, etc.

In the present embodiment, one of the above-mentioned tables for losing is set at the time when the first symbol starts to fluctuate, for example, when the probability is low and the first symbol display device 40 is in the state of the fluctuation time shortening function. There is one that is adopted when the number of pending operations of the first symbol is "0", and when the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is "0 to 201", it corresponds to no reach (completely missed), and " 202 to 208" correspond to a reach that is off front and back, and "209 to 238" correspond to a reach other than a reach that is off front and back.

Subsequently, in step S506, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the addition of the performance time, that is, the decision to add the performance time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S503 or the loss variation pattern determined in step S505. conduct. More specifically, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, the performance time increases due to the decorative pattern (third pattern) of the medium decorative pattern row on the third pattern display device 42 sliding to a stop (the corresponding medium decoration A variation pattern including an increase in the time it takes for the decorative symbols in the symbol row to slide and stop and be displayed is determined.

Further, in step S507, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 issues a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S503 or a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the losing variation pattern determined in step S505. Set.

Subsequently, in step S508, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 selects the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S502 ("first specific winning symbol", If a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to the "second specific winning symbol" or "non-specific winning symbol" is set and steps S504 and S505 have been passed, the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S504 Set the decorative pattern designation command corresponding to the missing pattern.

Subsequently, in step S509, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a performance time addition designation command corresponding to the performance time addition determined in step S506, and ends this process.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 15, if step S402 is YES, that is, if the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the process advances to step S407, and the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether the first symbol's variation time has elapsed or not. Determine whether The fluctuation time of this first symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and performance time addition determined as described above using FIG. A fluctuation time is determined, and when this fluctuation time has elapsed, an affirmative determination is made in step S407. If the variation time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S408, and if the variation time has elapsed, the process advances to step S409.

Then, in step S408, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 updates the variable display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 40. That is, the variable display of the first segment display section 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is continued, and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in step S409, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the variable display of the first symbol and sets the stop symbol of the first symbol to the display symbol. That is, when the jackpot symbol (probable variable jackpot) is determined in step S502 of FIG. 16, after the variable display of the first segment display section 40a of the first symbol display device 40, Stop and display with a symbol (means a definite hit (specific hit)). If the jackpot symbol (latent probability variable jackpot) is determined in step S502 of FIG. It will stop and display at (meaning a latent certain strange jackpot (latent specific hit)). If the jackpot symbol (usually jackpot) is determined in step S502 of FIG. 16, after the first segment display section 40a of the first symbol display device 40 displays the variable, the first segment display section 40a is displayed with a third symbol. Stop and display (usually means a jackpot (non-specific win)). If it is determined in step S504 of FIG. 16 that the symbol is out, the first segment display section 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops displaying the fourth symbol after the variable display of the first segment display section 40a ( (means out).

Subsequently, in step S410, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 sets a full stop command for instructing to stop the variation pattern of the decorative symbols (third symbols) that are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 42, After that, this process ends.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be explained. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S901, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the stack address and interrupt mode. Further, in step S902, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 permits RAM access, and in step S903, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets an external interrupt vector.

Thereafter, in step S904, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 513. In addition, in step S905, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 calculates a RAM judgment value, and in the subsequent step S906, determines whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the backup. Determine gender. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

Subsequently, in step S907, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs initial settings of the RAM 513 at the time of power restoration. Specifically, when the main control device 261 is initialized, a payout initialization command is sent from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 receives the initial payout command from the main control device 261. When the command is received, the RAM 513 is initialized at step S907 when the power is restored. That is, the RAM area is initialized and control of payout of game balls is started.

Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (ON) when the power is turned on, the main control device 261 is initialized, and a payout initialization command is sent from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311. Therefore, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 based on the payout initialization command from the main control device 261.

Subsequently, in step S908, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 initializes the peripheral devices of the CPU 511. Specifically, the CPU peripheral device is a timer control device called CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit), and this CTC is set to a predetermined value to generate a timer interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequently, in step S909, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets interrupt permission, and shifts to payout control processing to be described later.

On the other hand, in the case where the power-off occurrence information is not set in step S904, or in the case where an abnormality in the backup is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step S906, the dispensing control device 311 The CPU 511 clears the entire area of the RAM 513 to "0" (step S910), and performs initialization processing (step S911).

Next, the flow of the payout control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.

In FIG. 22, in step S1001, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 acquires and stores a command from the main control device 261. Here, the commands to be stored include 15 types of prize ball commands (15 types of prize ball commands for instructing the payout of 1 to 15 balls) and instructions to start payout control to the payout control device 311. There are a total of 17 types of commands, including a dispensing return command for dispensing and a dispensing initialization command for instructing the dispensing control device 311 to initialize dispensing.

In step S1002, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether the payout permission has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not a payout return command or a prize ball command has been received. Further, in step S1003, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 checks a state return switch (not shown) and executes the state return operation when it is determined that the state return operation has started.

Thereafter, in step S1004, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 executes setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full release state in accordance with the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state setting is executed, and when the lower tray is no longer full. , execute the setting for the lower tray full release state.

Further, in step S1005, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes setting of a tank ball no state or a tank ball no release state according to a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the no-tank-bulb state is determined based on the detection signal of the no-tank-bulb switch, and when there is no tank bulb, the no-tank bulb status is set, and when there is no tank bulb, the no-tank bulb release status is set. Run the settings.

Thereafter, in step S1006, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not there is a state to be notified, and if there is a state to be notified, the 7 segment LED provided in the payout control device 311 gives the notification.

In steps S1007 to S1009, a prize ball payout process is executed. In this case, if the prize balls are not in a disable state and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not "0" (NO in both steps S1007 and S1008), the process advances to step S1009, and the prize ball control process ( 23), which will be described later. Further, if the prize ball cannot be paid out or the total number of prize balls is 0 (YES in either step S1007 or S1008), the process shifts to the process of paying out rental balls.

After that, in steps S1010 to S1012, a process of paying out a loan ball is executed. In this case, if the rental ball is not in a state where it is not possible to pay out the rental ball, and if a rental ball payout request is received from the card unit (step S1010 is NO, S1011 is YES), the process advances to step S1012, and the ball rental control process (described later) is performed. Figure 24) starts. Further, if the rental ball cannot be put out or a rental ball delivery request has not been received (YES in step S1010 or NO in S1011), the subsequent vibration motor control (step S1013) is executed.

In step S1013, the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 controls the vibrator 360 (see FIG. 2) (vibrator motor control). After that, in step S1014, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether a power outage has occurred. If a power outage has occurred, the process advances to step S1015; otherwise, the process returns to step S1001. In step S1015, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets power-off occurrence information, and in step S1016, creates a RAM determination value. After that, it enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

Here, in the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 23, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the payout of the prize ball. In the following step S1102, it is determined whether the rotation of the dispensing motor 358a is normal based on the detection result of the dispensing rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process advances to step S1103, where the payout motor 358a is driven to execute a retry process and a process to stop the payout motor 358a, and then returns to the payout control process in FIG.

Further, if the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process advances to step S1104, and it is determined based on the detection result of the payout count switch whether or not the counting of game balls is being performed normally. If the count of game balls is not normal, the process advances to step S1105, where the payout motor 358a is driven to perform a retry process and a process to stop the payout motor 358a, and then returns to the payout control process in FIG.

Further, if the counting of game balls is normal, the process advances to step S1106, and it is determined whether the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch has reached the total number of prize balls and the payout is completed. If the payout has been completed, a process to stop the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1107, and then the process returns to the payout control process in FIG. 22.

Further, in the ball rental control process shown in FIG. 24, in step S1201, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the payout of the rental ball. In the following step S1202, it is determined whether the rotation of the dispensing motor 358a is normal based on the detection result of the dispensing rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process advances to step S1203, where the payout motor 358a is driven to perform a retry process and a process to stop the payout motor 358a, and then returns to the payout control process in FIG.

Further, if the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process advances to step S1204, and it is determined based on the detection result of the payout count switch whether or not the game balls are being counted normally. If the count of game balls is not normal, the process advances to step S1205, where the payout motor 358a is driven to perform a retry process and a process to stop the payout motor 358a, and then returns to the payout control process in FIG.

Further, if the counting of game balls is normal, the process advances to step S1206, and it is determined whether the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch has reached a predetermined number of rental balls (25 balls) and the payout has been completed. If the payout has been completed, a process to stop the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1207, and then the process returns to the payout control process in FIG. 22.

The above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like is stored in the backup area of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. Similarly, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 for a predetermined time after the power outage signal S1 is output so that the processing of the payout control device 311 can be executed. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal S1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 20 is started. Its contents are as explained in FIG. 20.

Next, main processing and normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be explained using FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262, and this main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on. FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of normal processing executed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262.

First, in step S1301, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes initial setting processing upon power-on. Specifically, port settings (port I/O switching and initial value output), timer settings (1 millisecond interval timer, LCD command strobe output timer), and interrupt settings (subcommand strobe interrupt) are performed. .

Further, in step S1302, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the power-off process is incomplete. Specifically, it is checked whether the various lamps (ring-shaped illumination section 102, central illumination section 103, etc.) of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are all turned off, and whether the speaker is in a muted state. Discern. If the power-off process is not completed, the process advances to step S1304; otherwise, the process advances to step S1303.

Subsequently, in step S1303, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub-control device 262 is destroyed. If it is destroyed, the process proceeds to step S1304; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1307. . In step S1304, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a read/write check on the RAM area of the sub-control device 262. Then, in step S1305, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the RAM of the sub-control device 262 is normal. If the RAM of the sub-control device 262 is normal, the process advances to step S1306, and if it is abnormal, the process advances to step S1312. In step S1306, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 writes RAM destruction check data for each area of the RAM 553, and sets RAM destruction check data for determining that the area is destroyed if there is an abnormality in reading.

Then, in step S1307, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the power is turned on after the power was turned off. If the power is turned on after the power has been turned off, the process advances to step S1308; otherwise, the process advances to step S1309.

In step S1308, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 clears the RAM areas other than the unprocessed RAM area. Specifically, the unprocessed RAM area is an area for storing information that would cause problems in the system if the data is cleared, and is an area for information that is desired to remain except when the RAM area is destroyed. Examples include subcommand reception buffers and power-on information. When the main control device 261 is powered off and the sub-control device 262 is reset (when a power-off notification command is received from the main control device 261), the RAM areas other than the unprocessed RAM area are cleared.

In step S1309, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets interrupt permission. In step S1310, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the initial value of the RAM of the sub-control device 262. In step S1311, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the effect initialization flag to "1" and shifts to normal processing shown in FIG. 26.

Note that in step S1312, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 issues a RAM abnormality notification and enters an infinite loop. For example, a notification may be made such as turning on a predetermined lamp unconditionally.

As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1401, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether 1 ms or more has passed since the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or more has elapsed, the process advances to step S1402; if not, the process advances to step S1410.

In step S1402, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs lamp output processing. Specifically, the lamp output is performed in accordance with the variation pattern presentation of the decorative pattern (third pattern) on the third pattern display device 42.

In step S1403, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 issues a power-on notification. Specifically, notification is performed for 30 seconds using a power-on command.

In step S1404, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a customer waiting effect. Specifically, title/still image switching is performed. In other words, a so-called demo screen is displayed.

In step S1405, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process of updating the pending number display of the first symbol variation. Specifically, this pending number display update process is a process for performing a display corresponding to the pending lamp 40c of the first symbol display device 40 on the third symbol display device 42 as well.

In step S1406, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring/presentation processing. Specifically, this frame button input monitoring/effect processing is performed on pachinko machines equipped with frame buttons that can be pressed by the player (for example, the upper selection button 71, the lower selection button 72, the effect button 80, etc. shown in FIG. 1). This is to perform a model-specific effect by pressing the frame button on the machine. Therefore, this process is not necessary in a pachinko machine that does not have such a frame button.

In step S1407, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs lamp editing processing. Specifically, processing is performed to edit a lamp lighting pattern that corresponds to (synchronizes with) the fluctuating pattern presentation of decorative symbols on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S1408, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs sound editing/output processing. Specifically, a process is performed to make a sound (sound, music, sound effect, etc.) corresponding to (synchronized with) the variation pattern performance of the decorative pattern on the third pattern display device 42.

In step S1409, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs production execution management processing. Specifically, time management is performed to synchronize the lamp, the sound, and the liquid crystal display (variable pattern display of decorative symbols on the third symbol display device 42).

In step S1410, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a process of updating the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern of the decorative symbols to be performed on the third symbol display device 42 and the effect of the sound lamp. Specifically, this random number may take a value from "0" to "32767", for example, and return to "0" when the upper limit value "37268" is reached.

In step S1411, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives commands from the main control device 261, it performs processing corresponding to each command.

Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives a fluctuation pattern designation command from the main control device 261, it transmits a display command obtained by converting the fluctuation pattern designation command to the display control device 45. Note that the fluctuation pattern designation command may be output as is. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives a decorative pattern designation command from the main control device 261, it transmits a stop display command obtained by converting the decorative pattern designation command to the display control device 45. Further, in the command conversion of the decorative design designation command, if a preview command is generated in addition to the stop display command, the preview command is also transmitted to the display control device 45. This advance notice command includes, for example, the presence or absence of a school of fish as a notice. Furthermore, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives an all-stop command (determined command) from the main control device 261, it transmits the all-stop command as is to the display control device 45.

In step S1412, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs command output processing to output a command to the display control device 45 or the like. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 transmits various commands, such as the above-mentioned display command and stop display command, to the display control device 45, for example.

In step S1413, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the RAM of the sub-control device 262 has been destroyed. If the RAM is not destroyed, the process returns to step S1401, and if it is destroyed, an infinite loop is entered.

Here, the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing in step S1406 shown in FIG. 26 by the sub-control device 262 will be explained using FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/presentation processing by the sub-control device 262.

The sub-control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring processing, as shown in FIG. Specifically, first, in step S1501, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs selection button input monitoring/presentation processing. Specifically, when the player is required to operate the selection buttons 71 to 74 to instruct a predetermined selection on the display screen 42a, in response to the player's selection operation of the selection buttons 71 to 74, Displays that a predetermined selection is to be made.

In step S1502, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs production button input monitoring and production processing, and ends this processing. Specifically, when the player is required to operate the performance button 80 on the display screen 42a to instruct the execution of a predetermined performance, the predetermined performance is executed in response to the player's pressing operation of the performance button 80. A message indicating the execution will be displayed.

Next, the production execution management process of step S1409 shown in FIG. 26 by the sub-control device 262 will be explained using FIG. 28.

In step S1901, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs processing upon reception of a prefetch variation pattern designation command. Hereinafter, the process when receiving the look-ahead variation pattern designation command will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process performed by the sub-control device 262 when receiving the prefetch variation pattern designation command.

In step S1911, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether a prefetch variation pattern designation command has been received. If the prefetching variation pattern designation command has been received, the process advances to step S1912; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S1912, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether a reserved ball storage area designation command has been received. If the reserved ball storage area designation command has been received, the process advances to step S1913; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S1913, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the currently received pre-reading variation pattern designation command in the reserved ball storage area specified by the reserved ball storage area designation command. The RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 is provided with a reserved ball storage area that corresponds to the reserved ball storage area (the execution area and the first to fourth reserved areas) provided in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the received command in one of the first to fourth holding areas designated by the prefetch variation pattern designation command.

In step S1914, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 refers to the pending display pattern selection table and determines the pending display pattern corresponding to the currently received variable pattern designation command for prefetching. In step S1915, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 converts the determined hold display pattern into a hold display command for display, and sends this hold display command for display and the above-mentioned hold ball storage area designation command to the display control device 45. Set to output. This completes the process.

<Open/close mode (jackpot) display setting process>
Returning to the performance management execution process shown in FIG. 28, in step S1902, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs an opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process. This opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process will be explained below using FIG. 30.

As shown in FIG. 30, in step S2201, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has received an opening command, the process proceeds to step S2202; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2203.

In step S2202, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display opening command.

In step S2203, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has received the ending command, the process proceeds to step S2204; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S2204, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display ending command and ends this process.

<Fluctuation display mode setting process>
Returning to the performance management execution process shown in FIG. 28, in step S1903, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a variable display mode setting process. This variable display mode setting process will be explained below using FIG. 31.

As shown in FIG. 31, in step S2301, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has received the variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if it has not received it, the process proceeds to step S2308.

In step S2302, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes processing to shift the data stored in the reserved ball storage area provided in the RAM 553. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding ball storage areas to the execution area side. Specifically, the data in each area is as follows: 1st holding area → execution area, 2nd holding area → 1st holding area, 3rd holding area → 2nd holding area, 4th holding area → 3rd holding area. is shifted.

In step S2303, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display variation pattern designation command for displaying, on the third symbol display device 42, a decorative pattern variation according to the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553. Then, the process advances to step S2304. The display variation pattern designation command is, for example, shown in FIG. This is a display command for executing a decorative pattern variation display with variation patterns such as , B, super reach A to D that miss the front and back, and completely miss A to F.

In step S2304, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the background image behind the main decorative pattern SZ and the developed pattern HZ on the third pattern display device 42 in response to the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553. A display background display pattern designation command for display is set, and the process advances to step S2305. Specifically, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines the background display patterns 1 to 5 using the variable pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553 and the background display pattern selection table shown in FIG. , converts a background display pattern determined from among background display patterns 1 to 5 into a background display pattern designation command for display.

In step S2305, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays a balloon image on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 at a predetermined timing during symbol variation display in response to the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553. A display balloon display pattern designation command for displaying the HD is set, and this processing ends. Specifically, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines a balloon display pattern using the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553 and a balloon display pattern selection table (not shown), and uses the determined balloon display pattern. Convert the display pattern to a display balloon display pattern specification command. The balloon image HD is a character image inserted at the lower right of the front screen 42a. For example, it is an image that includes characters such as "Reach!" or "Super Reach A" that informs the occurrence of normal reach or various super reach when reach is achieved by the main decorative pattern SZ. A character image such as a person or an animal may be used instead of the balloon image.

In step S2306, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a decorative design designation command has been received. If a decorative design designation command has been received, the process advances to step S2307; otherwise, the process ends. In addition, instead of determining whether or not the decorative pattern designation command is received, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation time according to the received fluctuation pattern designation command. It's okay. In this case, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives the variation pattern designation command, it reads the variation time from the command, measures the variation time with a timer, and grasps the end timing of the variation time.

In step S2307, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a stop display command (confirmation command) for stopping (confirmation) the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and executes this process. finish.

Next, normal processing and display mode switching processing of the display control device 45 will be described using FIGS. 32 and 33. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the display control device. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the display mode switching process performed by the display control device.

As shown in FIG. 32, in step S3001, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs command input processing for inputting various commands transmitted from the sub-control device 262, and proceeds to step S3002. These various commands include, for example, a display command, a stop display command, a display opening command, a display ending command, a demonstration start command, a symbol row variation start command, and the like.

In step S3002, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs processing for switching display modes (display of symbol row fluctuation, jackpot opening, jackpot ending, etc.), and proceeds to step S3003. Here, the switching process of the display mode, etc. will be explained using FIG. 33.

As shown in FIG. 33, in step S3101, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether a display command has been received. If a display command has been received, the process advances to step S3102; otherwise, the process advances to step S3103. The display command is a command sent from the sub-control device 262, and is a command for permitting display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 42 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, or a command for allowing the display of the third symbol after the end of the jackpot round. This is a command for returning the display mode of the display device 42 to normal mode.

In step S3102, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a normal screen on the third symbol display device 42. As shown in FIG. 5, the normal screen is a screen in which the main decorative pattern SZ and the sub-decorative pattern FZ are stopped and displayed in front of the normal background image in a manner that does not constitute a jackpot combination. The normal background image is stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3103, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether a demonstration screen display command has been received. If a demonstration screen display command has been received, the process advances to step S3104; otherwise, the process advances to step S3105. The demo screen display command is a command received from the sub-control device 262, and is a command for instructing switching from the normal screen to the demo screen when a predetermined time elapses without the player shooting a game ball. It is.

In step S3104, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a demonstration screen on the third symbol display device 42. The demo screen is an image that introduces the game method and the features of the game, and is stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3105, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether a display variation pattern designation command has been received. If the display variation pattern designation command has been received, the process advances to step S3106; otherwise, the process advances to step S3107.

In step S3106, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 starts the variation of the main decorative pattern SZ and the sub-decorative pattern FZ of the three decorative pattern rows L, M, and R shown in FIG. The display of the third symbol display device 42 is controlled so as to perform the following. Specifically, the variable display control of the main decorative pattern SZ and the sub-decorative pattern FZ is a control that executes steps S3003 to S3007, which will be described later.

In step S3107, if the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has received the display opening command, the process proceeds to step S3108; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3109.

In step S3108, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 to start displaying the jackpot opening image. The jackpot opening image is an image that is displayed after the decorative symbol variation display is determined as a jackpot combination, and is an image that congratulates the winning of the jackpot. Further, after the display of the jackpot opening is finished, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 starts displaying the jackpot round image. The jackpot round image is an image displayed during the jackpot round, and is, for example, a bonus image that can be viewed only during the jackpot round. The jackpot opening image and the jackpot round image are stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3109, if the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has received the display ending command, the process proceeds to step S3110; otherwise, the process ends. In step S3110, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 to start displaying the jackpot ending image. The jackpot ending image is stored in the video RAM of the display control device 45.

Returning to FIG. 32, in step S3003, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines a stop symbol, and proceeds to step S3004. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines a predetermined stop symbol from among the selectable stop symbol group determined by the display variation pattern designation command received from the sub-control device 262. If it is a jackpot variation pattern, a predetermined stop symbol is determined from odd or even symbols. If it is an out-of-order variation pattern, a predetermined stop pattern is determined from out-of-place symbols, out-of-place symbols other than the front and back, and complete out-of-place symbols.

In step S3004, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variable display mode of the decorative symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to step S3005.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern indicated by the display variable pattern designation command received from the sub-control device 262. For example, when the command indicates a jackpot normal reach A, B, the variable display mode shown in FIG. 34(a), which will be described later, is determined, and when the command indicates a jackpot super reach A, B, the variable display mode shown in FIG. 34(b), which will be described later, is determined. When the variable display mode is determined and the command indicates jackpot super reach C or D, the variable display mode shown in FIG. The variation display mode shown in d) is determined. In addition, when the command indicates a normal reach A, B that is out of the front or back or a normal reach A or B that is out of the front or back, the variable display mode shown in FIG. If the command is a missed super reach A or B, the variable display mode shown in FIG. 36(b), which will be described later, is determined, and if the command is a super reach C or D that is off before or after, or a super reach C or D that is off other than the front or back, then the variation display mode shown in FIG. 36 (described later) is determined. The variable display mode shown in (c) is determined, and if the command is completely missed A to F, the variable display mode shown in FIGS. 36(d) to (f), which will be described later, is determined. Each of the above-described variable display modes is stored in the program ROM of the display control device 45.

In step S3005, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines auxiliary effects (display mode of message and suggestion images such as balloon images HD to be provided and displayed to the player), and proceeds to step S3006. The suggestion image is an image that suggests the possibility that the symbol variation display executed by the third symbol display device 42 will result in a jackpot combination.

In step S3006, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display image of the third symbol display device 42.

Specifically, in the case of displaying a symbol variation display image on the third symbol display device 42, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines in step S3004, as shown in FIGS. 37 to 43, which will be described later. The main decorative pattern SZ and the sub-decorative pattern FZ in each of the decorative pattern rows L, M, and R are displayed in a variable manner according to the variable display mode determined in step S3003, and finally stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop pattern determined in step S3003. The display of the third symbol display device 42 is controlled as follows. In accordance with the display background display pattern designation command received from the sub-control device 262, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets a background image according to the display mode of the symbol variation display so that it is displayed behind the symbol variation display image. 3. Controls the display of the symbol display device 42. Note that the background image includes a landscape image, a character image such as a person, an animal, etc. that is displayed behind the main decorative pattern SZ and the sub-decorative pattern FZ. Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the balloon image HD on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 at a predetermined timing during symbol variation display according to the display balloon display pattern designation command received from the sub-control device 262. The display of the third symbol display device 42 is controlled so that the display is displayed at the lower right. The balloon image HD is displayed one or more times during one symbol variation display.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also performs display image control to display a jackpot round image on the third symbol display device 42. If it is a jackpot round image, an image showing the current number of rounds is displayed along with a bonus image displayed during the jackpot round. Further, if there is a resident image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 42, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also performs display image control to display the resident image on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S3007, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a hold display control to execute a hold display on the third symbol display device 42.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes processing corresponding to the display hold display command received from the sub-control device 262. When the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the hold display command for display received from the sub-control device 262, it reads out the hold display execution program corresponding to the hold display pattern indicated by the received hold display command for display from the program ROM 552 and executes it. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the hold display execution program, the hold display execution pattern in the first to fourth hold display areas and the hold display execution pattern in the hold display area are predetermined.

Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a process of shifting the pending display displayed in the pending display area every time the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is completed. Specifically, when the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is finished, the pending display in the execution display area is erased, and the first pending display area → execution display area, the second pending display area → the first pending display area, and the third pending display area are displayed. The hold display is shifted in the following order: display area → second hold display area, fourth hold display area → third hold display area. When the number of pending pitches is 0, a pending display is performed in the execution display area.

In step S3008, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs other processing such as demonstration display.

In step S3009, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether 1 ms or more has passed since the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or more has elapsed, the process returns to step S3001; if it has not elapsed, the process returns to step S3008.

A time chart of the symbol variation display executed by the display control device 45 and a time chart of various effects associated with the symbol variation display will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36.

FIGS. 34(a) to 34(d) are time charts illustrating symbol variation displays in jackpot normal reaches A and B and jackpot super reaches A to E.

The jackpot normal reaches A and B shown in FIG. 34(a) are fluctuation patterns corresponding to symbol fluctuation display pattern 1 described with reference to FIG. 9, and the fluctuation time is 32 seconds. From the timing t1 when the main decorative pattern SZ starts to fluctuate, all the main decorative patterns SZ in the left row L, center row M, and right row R start to fluctuate. From timing t2 10 seconds after the start of variation, the left column L and center column M of the main decorative pattern SZ stop at a combination indicating a jackpot, and the remaining right column R starts displaying a variable normal reach. In the jackpot normal reach A and B, the main decorative pattern SZ continues to be displayed while the reach is displayed. At timing t3, 30 seconds after the start of the variation, the main decorative symbols SZ in the right row R are stopped so as to form a jackpot combination, and then at timing t4, approximately 2 seconds have elapsed, the variable display of the main decorative symbols SZ is finalized. This allows the player to recognize that the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed during the normal fluctuations and normal reach display for the jackpot normal reaches A and B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34(b), jackpot super reach A and B are fluctuation patterns corresponding to symbol fluctuation display pattern 2 explained with reference to FIG. 9, and the fluctuation time is 62 seconds. It is the same as the above-mentioned jackpot normal reach A and B in that the fluctuation of the main decorative pattern SZ starts from timing t1, and the display of the normal reach of the main decorative pattern SZ starts from timing t2. For jackpot super reach A and B, the reach development effect is started at timing t2a 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation. At the start of the reach development performance, the main decorative pattern SZ is changed to the development pattern HZ for the reach development performance. That is, during the ready-to-reach development performance, the ready-to-reach display in the left column L and center column M of the main decorative symbol SZ is replaced by the ready-to-reach display in the developed symbol HZ, and the fluctuating right column R continues to fluctuate as the developed symbol HZ. Thereby, the player's expectation of a jackpot can be increased at the time when the normal reach by the main decorative pattern SZ is switched to the reach development effect by the developed pattern HZ.

At timing t2b, 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation of the developed symbol HZ corresponding to the right row R is stopped for about 0.2 seconds due to an unsuccessful combination, and the fluctuation of the developed symbol HZ corresponding to the right row R starts again. A re-fluctuation effect will be performed. The variation in the reach development pattern from timing t2 to timing t2b is a pseudo variation that is not a variation that displays a confirmed display, so it will be referred to as pseudo series 1 below. The re-variation starting from timing t2c is a variation (hereinafter referred to as final variation) that displays a final display as described later. The re-variation is not limited to only the developed symbols HZ corresponding to the right row R, but also the developed symbols HZ corresponding to the left column L and center column M may be re-varied.

In the final variation, at timing t2i 58 seconds after the start of variation, the variation of the right symbols of the developed symbol HZ stops at a predetermined combination. After the jackpot combination of the developed symbol HZ is displayed for 2 seconds, the jackpot combination of the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed at timing t3 60 seconds after the start of variation. At timing t4 when the jackpot combination of the main decorative symbols SZ is displayed for about 2 seconds, the variable display of the main decorative symbols SZ is finalized. Thereby, even if the jackpot super reach A and B change from the main decorative pattern SZ to the developed pattern HZ during the ready-to-reach display, the player can be made aware that they will return to the main decorative pattern SZ when the change is confirmed.

Next, jackpot super reach C and D shown in FIG. 34(c) are fluctuation patterns corresponding to symbol fluctuation display pattern 3 explained with reference to FIG. 9, and the fluctuation time is 82 seconds. The fluctuation from timing t1 to timing t2b is the same as jackpot super reach A and B. Jackpot Super Reach C, D is a variation display (pseudo series 1 ) is performed, and a re-variation effect is performed in which the development symbol HZ corresponding to the right row R starts to fluctuate again. After that, at timing t2c, 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation of the developed symbol HZ corresponding to the right row R is stopped for about 0.2 seconds due to an unsuccessful combination, and the fluctuation of the developed symbol HZ corresponding to the right row R is stopped for about 0.2 seconds. The re-fluctuation effect will be started again. The variation in the reach development pattern from timing t2b to timing t2c is a pseudo variation that is not a variation that displays a confirmed display, and is performed after pseudo series 1, so it will be referred to as pseudo series 2 below. In addition, jackpot super reaches C and D, in which the pseudo-run continues twice, are variable patterns that are more often selected in the event of a jackpot win than jackpot super reaches A and B, in which the pseudo-run only occurs once. You can increase your expectation of winning a jackpot.

The re-fluctuation starting from timing t2c is the final fluctuation for displaying a final display, as will be described later. In the final variation, at timing t2i 78 seconds after the start of variation, the variation of the right symbols of the developed symbol HZ stops at a predetermined combination. After the jackpot combination of the developed symbol HZ is displayed for 2 seconds, the jackpot combination of the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed at timing t3, 80 seconds after the start of variation. At timing t4 when the jackpot combination of the main decorative symbols SZ is displayed for about 2 seconds, the variable display of the main decorative symbols SZ is finalized. Thereby, even when the jackpot super reach C and D change from the main decorative pattern SZ to the developed pattern HZ during the ready-to-reach display, the player can be made aware that the jackpot super reach C and D will return to the main decorative pattern SZ when the change is confirmed.

Next, the jackpot super reach E, as shown in FIG. 34(d), is a variation pattern corresponding to symbol variation display pattern 4 described with reference to FIG. 9, and the variation time is 92 seconds. The fluctuation from timing t1 to timing t2c is the same as super reach C and D. At timing t2c, 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, a fluctuation display (pseudo series 2) is performed in which the fluctuation of the developed symbol HZ corresponding to right row R is stopped for about 0.2 seconds due to an unsuccessful combination, and the fluctuation display (pseudo series 2) is performed. A re-variation (final variation) is performed in which the variation of the developed pattern HZ corresponding to is started again.

In the final variation, at timing t2f 78 seconds after the start of variation, the variation of the right symbol of the developed symbol HZ stops for about 2 seconds due to a combination that is out of reach. In the jackpot super reach E, after the out-of-reach combination of developed symbols HZ is displayed for about 2 seconds, the out-of-reach combination of main decorative symbols SZ is displayed at timing t2g, 80 seconds after the start of variation. In the jackpot super reach E, at timing t2h 82 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the out-of-reach combination of the main decorative symbol SZ is switched again to the fluctuating state of the right symbol in the reach combination by the developed symbol HZ. In other words, the variation in reach combinations due to the developed symbol HZ is restored.
The revival of variation in the reach combination by the developed symbol HZ is displayed until timing t2i, 88 seconds after the start of variation. In the jackpot super reach E, a jackpot combination of developed symbols HZ is displayed at timing t2i 88 seconds after the start of variation, and a jackpot combination of main decorative symbols SZ is displayed at timing t3 90 seconds after the start of variation. At timing t4 (not shown) when the jackpot combination by the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed for about 2 seconds, the variable display by the main decorative pattern SZ is finalized.

In this way, the jackpot super reach E is generated after the super reach failure is displayed on the developed symbol HZ in the final variation of the reach development effect, and before the symbol variation by the developed symbol HZ is restored, on the main decorative symbol SZ. Since the super reach miss is displayed, unlike the conventional re-variation performance that simply displays the super reach miss due to the development symbol HZ in the reach development production and then revives the symbol fluctuation of the development symbol HZ, a series of The symbol variation of the developed symbol HZ can be restored after the symbol variation display is strongly impressed upon the player with the image that it has been confirmed due to the out of super reach. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the revival performance in the symbol variation display.

Next, a time chart of various suggestion effects executed together with the variable display of the jackpot super reach E will be explained with reference to FIG. 35.

The pending change in the pending display TH in the jackpot super reach E is performed according to the pending display pattern 7 described with reference to FIG. 10, as shown in FIG. 35(b). The pending display TH is displayed in blue from the fluctuation start timing t1 of the main decorative pattern SZ (if there are the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, from the timing at which the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4 are displayed). This blue pending display is displayed at the start timing t2 of the reach display by the main decorative symbol SZ, the start timing t2a of the reach development display (pseudo series 1) by the development symbol HZ in the reach development effect, and the start timing t2a of the reach development display (pseudo series 1) by the development symbol HZ in the reach development effect. After the start timing t2b, the start timing t2c of the final variation due to the developed symbol HZ, the timing t2f when the out-of-reach combination of the developed symbol HZ is displayed in the final variation due to the developed symbol HZ, and the timing when the display of the out-of-reach combination of the developed symbol HZ ends. It continues until just before t2g. Then, the pending display TH changes to a rainbow color at timing t2g when the display of the out-of-reach combination of the developed symbol HZ ends and the out-of-reach combination of the decorative symbol SZ is displayed. This rainbow-colored pending display is displayed at timing t2i when the result of the fluctuation revival by the developed symbol HZ is displayed as a jackpot combination, and when the result of the series of symbol fluctuation display by the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed as a jackpot combination. This continues until the end of the determination period from timing t3 until the display of the jackpot combination by the main decorative pattern SZ ends. As a result, the pending change of the corresponding pending display TH in the jackpot super reach E is not limited to the jackpot super reach E for players who have seen or are aware of the pending change based on the pending change pattern 7. Even in fluctuation patterns other than the jackpot super reach E, the color suggests that there is a low possibility that the pending display TH will become a jackpot combination until the end of the display indicating that the result of the reach development effect by the development symbol HZ is out of reach. Even in this case, it is displayed that the result of the reach development effect by the development symbol HZ is out of reach, and the hold display pattern 7 is displayed until the last moment of the symbol variation display when the combination of out of reach by the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed. It is possible to show a reach effect while maintaining the expectation that a pending change like this will occur.

Next, the background display pattern in the jackpot super reach E is executed according to the background display pattern 4 described with reference to FIG. 11, as shown in FIG. 35(c). As for the background display, the normal background is displayed at timing t1 when the decorative pattern SZ starts variable display. The normal background is, for example, a landscape image displaying scenery such as nature or a cityscape. The background image may be a still image or a moving image scrolled in the horizontal direction.

In addition, if the variable display before the variable display of Jackpot Super Reach E starts is a variable display of a losing pattern, the normal background is displayed even when the losing pattern is confirmed, and the pending ball for the next variable display is displayed. If there is, the variable display of the current jackpot super reach E will start continuously from the confirmation screen of the losing pattern. If there are no balls on hold for the next variable display, the normal background in which the missed pattern has been determined continues to be displayed until the next variable display starts. In this case, the normal background becomes a standby screen until the next variable display starts.

The background display is switched from the normal background to a ready-to-reach development background different from the normal background at timing t2a when the ready-to-reach development effect by the development symbol HZ is started. The reach development background is, for example, a confrontation image such as a confrontation effect in which an ally character and an enemy character face off in front of a landscape image for reach development. The confrontation image is usually set in such a way that the player can recognize whether the symbol variation display being executed is a missed super reach or a jackpot super reach. For example, a confrontation image corresponding to a missed super reach will display a defeat result in which a confrontation between an ally character and an enemy character ends with the ally character's defeat, and a confrontation image corresponding to a jackpot super reach will display a defeat result in which an ally character and an enemy character face off. A victory result is displayed where a showdown performance in which a character confronts ends with victory for an ally character.

The reach development background (confrontation image) corresponding to the jackpot super reach E is such that at the timing t2a when the pseudo series 1 based on the development pattern HZ starts, the first confrontation image in which the ally character confronts the enemy character is displayed, and the pseudo series 1 At the timing t2b when the character is out of reach, the first losing color image is displayed in which the friendly character is likely to lose to the enemy character in the first confrontation, and at 0.2 seconds of the timing t2b when the pseudo series 2 by the developed symbol HZ starts. Later, a second confrontation image in which an ally character confronts an enemy character is displayed, and at timing t2c when pseudo-relationship 2 displays an out-of-reach image, a second confrontation image in which the ally character is likely to lose to the enemy character in the second confrontation is displayed. A losing color image is displayed, and 0.2 seconds after the timing t2c when the final variation due to the developed symbol HZ starts, a third confrontation image in which an ally character confronts an enemy character is displayed, and the final variation indicates that the final variation is out of reach. At timing t2f, a third losing color image is displayed in which the friendly character is likely to lose to the enemy character in the third confrontation. The third losing color image is displayed behind the main decorative pattern SZ that was arranged in a combination different from the jackpot combination at the start of this symbol variation display at the timing t2g when the out-of-reach combination by the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed. The landscape image is returned to the same normal background (original normal background). This initial normal background can make the player think that the result of this symbol variation display is determined by being out of reach. This initial normal background is a resurrection background image in which the ally character that made the player think that he lost to the enemy character in the third losing color image revives and wins against the enemy character at timing t2h when the variation due to the decorative pattern SZ is restored. can be switched to The resurrection background image is returned to the original normal background again at timing t3 when the display of the jackpot combination by the developed symbol HZ ends as a result of the resurrection variation. This second initial normal background can inform the player that the result of this symbol variation display has been determined as a jackpot combination.

In this way, the background display in the jackpot super reach E is such that after the background indicating that the result of the reach development effect is out of reach is displayed in the development background display of the final variation of the reach development effect, the pattern by the development pattern HZ is displayed. Before the background for the revival effect that indicates that the variation is coming back is displayed, it is set to return to the normal background that is displayed when a combination that is out of reach is confirmed. This is different from the background display in conventional re-variation effects, where a background indicating that the result of the effect is out of reach is displayed, and then a background for a revival effect indicating that the symbol variation due to the developed pattern HZ will be revived is displayed. After the background display gives the player a strong impression that the series of symbol fluctuations have been confirmed due to the super reach, a background for a revival effect indicating that the symbol fluctuations due to the developed symbol HZ will be revived is displayed. It can be shown to players. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the background display accompanying the revival effect in the symbol variation display.

Next, the sound output in the jackpot super reach E is performed according to the sound output pattern 4 described with reference to FIG. 12, as shown in FIG. 35(d). As for the sound output in the jackpot super reach E, normal music that is music played while the main decorative pattern SZ is fluctuating is output at timing t1 when the fluctuating display of the main decorative pattern SZ starts. The normal music is output even during the ready-to-reach display using the main decorative pattern SZ.

The normal music is switched to reach development music D, which is different from the normal music and is played during the reach development performance, at timing t2a when the reach development performance is started. The reach development music D is music that makes the player recognize that the reach display has developed from a normal reach to a reach (super reach) with high expectations for a jackpot. Reach development music D is the confrontation music that is played in conjunction with the confrontation between an ally character and an enemy character that takes place in the above-mentioned reach development background, and the screams of the losing character and the decisive lines of the winning character, etc., which inform the player of the outcome of the confrontation. It also includes the voice that is recognized by the user. In the reach development music D, the screams of the ally characters and the decisive lines of the enemy characters are played along with the confrontation music at the timing t2f when the out-of-reach combination is displayed in the final variation by the development symbol HZ. Thereby, the player can be made aware that the result of the reach development effect will end with the reach being out of reach. The reach development music D is temporarily stopped at timing t2g when the out-of-reach combination of the main decorative symbols SZ is displayed, and then the normal music is restarted. As a result, the player recognizes that this symbol fluctuation display is an out-of-reach pattern such as Super Reach Out-of-Reach C and D, which is confirmed as out-of-reach at this point, and then transitions to the standby screen where the normal music resumes. can be done.

As for the sound output, at timing t2h, revival music that is different from the normal music and the reach development music and that is played during the revival performance is output. The resurrection music is music that is played along with the image of the ally character resurrecting and defeating the enemy character in the above-mentioned resurrection background, or the ally character's signature lines. The resurrection music is output until the timing t3 when the display that the result of the resurrection fluctuation by the developed symbol HZ is a jackpot combination ends, and is stopped at the timing t3. Thereby, the player can be made aware that the result of the variable display of the main decorative pattern SZ has been determined as a jackpot combination.

In this way, the sound output in the jackpot super reach E is changed after the sound indicating that the result of the reach development performance is out of reach is output in the sound output of the reach development music D of the final variation of the reach development performance. Before the sound for the resurrection effect indicating that the symbol variation due to the symbol HZ will be revived is output, the normal music is resumed after the developmental music is temporarily stopped in the same way as when it is confirmed that the reach is out of reach due to the main decorative symbol SZ. Therefore, during the output of the development music in the reach development performance, a sound effect or audio sound indicating that the result of the reach development performance is out of reach is simply output, and then a revival indicating that the symbol fluctuation due to the development symbol HZ will be restored. Unlike the sound output in conventional re-variation performances that output music for the production, the sound output also shows a series of symbol fluctuation displays that are confirmed when the super reach is missed, and the normal music is resumed on the standby screen or normal screen. After giving a strong impression to the player that the image has shifted to , the player can be made to listen to music for a revival performance indicating that the pattern variation due to the developed pattern HZ is restored. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the sound output performance in the symbol variation display accompanying the revival performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the variable display of out-of-line patterns will be explained. FIGS. 36(a) to (f) are time charts explaining the symbol variation display in front and rear misses, front and rear misses normal reaches A and B, front and rear misses, front and rear misses other than front and rear misses super reaches A to D, and complete front and rear misses A to F. It is.

As shown in FIGS. 36(d) to 36(f), the completely missed fluctuation patterns A to F are fluctuation patterns executed according to the symbol fluctuation display pattern 5 described with reference to FIG. They are different for 12 seconds, 22 seconds, and 32 seconds, but since none of them go through reach, it is difficult to make the player expect a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), normal reaches A and B that are out of the front and back and normal reaches A and B that are out of the front and back are fluctuation patterns that are executed according to the symbol fluctuation display pattern 1 explained with reference to FIG. The time is 32 seconds. The missed normal reaches A and B are displayed as a combination of the missed normal reach results with the main decorative pattern SZ at timing t3 when the normal reach results with the main decorative pattern SZ are displayed. Therefore, in the missed super reach A and B, the player can expect a big hit at least until just before the timing t3 when the result of the normal reach by the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 36(b), super reaches A and B that are out of the front and back and super reaches A and B that are out of the front and back are fluctuation patterns that are executed according to the symbol fluctuation display pattern 2 explained with reference to FIG. , the fluctuation time is 62 seconds. For out-of-reach super reaches A and B, at timing t2i 58 seconds after the start of variation, a combination of out-of-reach by development symbol HZ is displayed as a result of the second re-variation (final variation) in the reach development effect, At timing t3 60 seconds later, a combination of main decorative symbols SZ that is out of reach is displayed, and at timing t4, 62 seconds after the start of variation, the display of a combination of main decorative symbols SZ that is out of reach is determined. In the case of a missed super reach in a conventional gaming machine, if the combination of a missed reach due to the developed symbol HZ is still displayed at the timing when the final variation due to the developed symbol HZ ends, the state is expected to become a jackpot. It is not possible to show reach performance. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as in symbol variation display pattern 4 of jackpot Super REIT E described above, an out-of-reach combination is displayed as a result of the final variation due to the developed symbol HZ, and an out-of-reach combination due to the main decorative symbol HZ is displayed. Even after the combination is displayed, the variation due to the developed symbol HZ may return and result in a jackpot, so even in the missed super reach A and B, the reach due to the main decorative symbol SZ, which is the last moment of the symbol variation display. Until the timing t4 when the display of the winning combination is confirmed, the ready-to-win effect can be shown in a state where the fluctuation due to the developed symbol HZ is restored and the player expects a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 36(c), super reaches C and D outside the front and back and super reaches C and D other than the front and rear are fluctuation patterns executed according to the symbol fluctuation display pattern 3 described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation time is 82 seconds. For out-of-reach super reach C and D, at timing t2i 78 seconds after the start of variation, a combination of out-of-reach by development symbol HZ is displayed as a result of the third re-variation (final variation) in the reach development effect, and from the start of variation. At timing t3 80 seconds later, the combination of out-of-reach by decorative symbols SZ is displayed, and at timing t4, 82 seconds after the start of variation, the display of the out-of-reach combination by main decorative symbols SZ is confirmed. In this embodiment, like the symbol variation display pattern 4 in the jackpot super reach E described above, the out-of-reach combination with the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed 80 seconds after the start of the variation, and the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed 82 seconds after the start of the variation. Even after the out-of-reach combination is displayed, the variation due to the developed pattern HZ may return and result in a jackpot, so even in the out-of-reach super reach C and D, the main decorative symbol, which is the last moment of the symbol variation display, Until the timing t4 when the display of the out-of-reach combination by SZ is confirmed, the reach effect can be shown in a state where the fluctuation by the developed symbol HZ is revived and the expectation is that it will become a jackpot.

Execution examples of each variation pattern in the symbol variation display of the third symbol display device 42 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 43. First, with reference to FIG. 37, an example of the execution of the variation pattern of complete deviation A will be described.

As shown in (a), on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, if the variation pattern that was executed immediately before is a winning pattern, the winning combination of the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed, and the winning combination of the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed. A normal background NH is displayed behind. The screen on which the missing combination of the main decorative pattern SZ and the normal background HZ are displayed will be the standby screen until the symbol variation display of the current complete miss A starts, and the display of the variation display of the current complete miss A will be This will be the start screen when starting. On the screen shown in (a), the relevant hold display TH corresponding to the previous fluctuation pattern, and if the hold is full, the first hold display HY1, the second hold display HY2, the third hold display HY3, and the fourth hold display HY4 (generally referred to as hold display HY) is displayed. For example, in FIG. 37, the pending display HY is all white. If the result of the previous symbol variation display is completely out of reach or out of normal reach, the music usually continues to play. If the result of the immediately preceding symbol variation display is out of the super reach, reach development music corresponding to the super reach is stopped at the time when the immediately preceding symbol variation display is confirmed, and then normal music is played.

In the screen shown in (b), the pending display HY is shifted to the left one by one at the time when the main decorative pattern SZ starts changing. That is, the first pending display HY1 shown in (a) is shifted to the corresponding pending display TH, and the variable display (total variation) of the main decorative pattern SZ is started. The background NH is usually displayed behind all the fluctuations. In the screen shown in (c), the main decorative pattern SZ is stopped in a completely incorrect combination, and the normal background NH is displayed behind it. Normal music continues to be played even after the result of the symbol variation display is determined. If there is at least the first pending display HY1 when the result of the symbol fluctuation display is confirmed, the normal music will continue to be played, but if there is no first pending display HY1, the normal music will be replaced with the non-fluctuation music or You may also change it to silence. As a result, the player can recognize that the symbol variation display has become a loss screen or a standby screen that informs that the symbol change display has been confirmed as a loss.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, an example of the execution of the variation pattern of the normal reach A that is off except the front and back will be described.

In the screen shown in (a), the start screen when the current normal reach A variable display is started is displayed. In the screen shown in (b), a variation display (total variation) of the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed, and a normal background NH is displayed behind the total variation. In the screen shown in (c), it is displayed that the left row L and center row M of the main decorative symbols SZ stop at the reach combination, and the right row R continues to fluctuate. On the screen shown in (c), a balloon image HD indicating, for example, "Reach!" indicating the establishment of a normal reach is displayed. On the screen shown in (d), an out-of-reach screen is displayed in which the result of the variation during the reach due to the main decorative pattern SZ is a combination of out-of-reach, and the out-of-reach is confirmed as it is. If the normal reach variation pattern is executed, the normal music will continue to play. Thereby, the player can recognize that the symbol variation display has become a normal reach out screen or a standby screen that informs that the normal reach out of reach has been confirmed.

Next, an example of execution of the variation pattern of jackpot super reach B will be explained with reference to FIG.

As shown in (a), in the reach display of the main decorative pattern SZ of the jackpot super reach B, the third symbol display device 42 displays, for example, a speech bubble image of "super reach B" indicating that the reach display is super reach B. HD is displayed. The balloon image HD may be a content such as "○○ VS △△, confrontation reach" indicating the content of the effect executed on the background screen of Super Reach B, for example. ○○ is filled with the name of an ally character, and △△ is filled with the name of an enemy character. The enemy character in super reach B is enemy character B. The display timing of the balloon image HD may be the start timing of the reach development effect. The same applies to the following description. Normal music continues to play until the screen display in (a) ends.

In the screen shown in (b), the reach variation (pseudo series 1) due to the development pattern HZ, the text image of "Game! vs Character B" as the reach development background HH1 that constitutes the development background B, and the ally character and the enemy character B. An image of the first confrontation is displayed. In addition, the normal music is switched to advanced music B that matches the confrontation with enemy character B. In the screen shown in (c), the reach variation (pseudo-association 1) due to the development pattern HZ is likely to miss, and the ally character is likely to lose to the enemy character B in the first confrontation image as the reach development background HH1. An image of the text ``Unfortunate!?'' and an image of the first defeat are displayed.

On the screen shown in (d), the reach variation by the development pattern HZ is restarted (pseudo series 2, final variation), and the text image of "One Chance!" and the ally character are displayed on the reach development background HH2 that constitutes the development background B. A second confrontation image in which the enemy character B faces off is displayed. The development music B continues to be played while the reach development background HH2 is displayed, but it may be replaced with music that matches the second confrontation image. At this time, the pending display TH changes from white to blue. On the screen shown in (e), it is displayed that the result of the final fluctuation by the development symbol HZ is a jackpot combination, and in the reach development background HH2, the text image of "You did it!" and the ally character win against the enemy character B. The winning image is displayed. At this time, a jackpot notification sound indicating that the result of the reach development effect is a jackpot (for example, a sound effect indicating that an ally character has won, a ally character's voice saying ``You did it'', a decisive line, or a voice shouting victory) is output together with developed music B. On the screen shown in (f), the jackpot combination by the developed symbol HZ is displayed as the jackpot combination by the main decorative symbol SZ, and it is displayed that the series of symbol variation displays have been confirmed as a jackpot. At this time, instead of the advanced music B, music congratulating the jackpot or music (for example, a voice saying "Congratulations") is output as the jackpot confirmation sound.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, an example of the execution of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B that is out of the front and back will be described.

As shown in (a), in the reach display of the main decorative pattern SZ of the super reach B which is out of the front and back, for example, a balloon image HD of "Super reach B" is displayed indicating that the reach display is super reach B, and normally Music output continues. In the screen shown in (b), there is a reach variation (pseudo series 1) due to the development pattern HZ, a text image of "Game! vs Character B" as the reach development background HH1, and an ally character with the enemy character B according to the reach development background HH1. A first confrontation image is displayed, and developed music B is output in place of the normal music. In the screen shown in (c), the reach variation (pseudo-association 1) due to the development pattern HZ is likely to miss, and the ally character is likely to lose to the enemy character B in the first confrontation image as the reach development background HH1. An image of the text ``Unfortunate!?'' and an image of the first defeat are displayed.

In the screen shown in (d), the reach variation by the development pattern HZ is restarted (pseudo series 2, final variation), and in the reach development background HH2, the text image of "One Chance!" and the friendly character confront the enemy character D. The second confrontation image is displayed, and the output of developed music B continues. At this time, the pending display TH changes from white to blue. In the screen shown in (e), the reach variation (pseudo-association 2) due to the development pattern HZ is displayed in a combination that is out of reach, and the ally character is likely to lose to the enemy character B in the second confrontation image with the reach development background HH2. A second losing color image indicating that the player has lost the game and a text image of "Unfortunate!" that strengthens the impression of losing are displayed, and a failure notification sound (for example, Sound effects, voices, music, lines such as "I'm sorry", etc. indicating that the ally character loses are output together with the developed music B. On the screen shown in (f), the out-of-reach combination due to the development symbol HZ is displayed as the out-of-reach combination due to the main decorative symbol SZ, and the output of the development music B is stopped.

In this example, like the above-mentioned jackpot Super REIT E, after a combination that is out of reach is displayed as a result of the re-variation (final variation) due to the developed symbol HZ, a combination that is out of reach due to the decorative symbol SZ is displayed. At this timing, there is a pattern in which the pending display TH changes from blue to rainbow color, and the variation due to the developed symbol HZ is revived, resulting in a jackpot, so the main decorative symbol shown in (f), which is the last moment of the symbol variation display, A ready-to-reach effect can be shown in a state where the user expects the hold display TH to change from blue to rainbow color until the display of the SZ missed screen ends. In addition, even if the pending display TH does not change to rainbow color on the missed screen of the main decorative symbol SZ shown in (f), the fluctuation due to the developed symbol HZ will be revived until the last moment of the symbol fluctuation display, resulting in a jackpot. It is possible to show a reach effect in a state where expectations are high.

Next, an example of the execution of the variation pattern of the jackpot super reach D will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the pending display TH has been displayed in blue since the start of the fluctuation of the main decorative pattern SZ.

As shown in (a), in the reach display of the main decorative pattern SZ of the jackpot super reach D, for example, a speech bubble image HD of "Super Reach D" indicating that the reach display is super reach D is displayed, and the normal music The output continues. In the screen shown in (b), the reach variation (pseudo series 1) due to the development pattern HZ, the text image of "game vs character D" as the reach development background HH1, and the image of the first confrontation in which the ally character confronts the enemy character D is displayed, and the normal music is switched to advanced music D. The screen shown in (c) shows how the reach variation (pseudo-association 1) due to the development pattern HZ is about to miss, and how the ally character is about to lose to the enemy character D in the first confrontation image as the reach development background HH1. An image of the text ``Unfortunate!?'' and an image of the first defeat are displayed.

In the screen shown in (d), the reach variation due to the development pattern HZ is resumed (pseudo series 2), and in (e), in the reach development background HH2, the text image of "One Chance!" and the ally character are the enemy character D. The second confrontation image is displayed, and the development music D continues to be output. In the screen shown in (e), it seems that the reach variation (pseudo chain 2) due to the development pattern HZ is likely to miss, and the ally character is likely to lose to the enemy character D in the second confrontation image with the reach development background HH2. An image of the text ``Sorry again!'' and an image of the second defeat are displayed.

On the screen shown in (f), the reach fluctuation by the development pattern HZ is resumed (pseudo series 3, final fluctuation), and in the reach development background HH3, the text image of "One more chance!" and the friendly character and the enemy character D are The third confrontation image is displayed, and the output of development music D continues. At this time, the hold display TH changes from blue to red. On the screen shown in (g), it is displayed that the result of the final fluctuation by the development symbol HZ is a jackpot combination, and the text image of "You did it!" and the ally character win against the enemy character D in the reach development background HH3. A winning image is displayed, and a jackpot notification sound is output along with the developed music D. On the screen shown in (h), the jackpot combination with the developed symbol HZ is displayed as the jackpot combination with the main decorative symbol SZ, a series of symbol variation displays are displayed indicating that the jackpot has been confirmed, and the jackpot confirmation sound is replaced with the developmental music D. is output.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, an example of the execution of the variation pattern of the super reach D that is out of order will be described. Note that the pending display TH has been displayed in blue since the start of the fluctuation of the main decorative pattern SZ.

As shown in (a), in the reach display of the main decorative pattern SZ of the super reach D that is out of the front and back, for example, a balloon image HD of "Super reach D" indicating that the reach display is the super reach D is displayed, and normally Music output continues. On the screen shown in (b), the image of the first confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character D based on the reach variation (Pseudo-Run 1) due to the development pattern HZ and the reach development background HH1 is displayed, and the development is replaced with normal music. Music D is output. The screen shown in (c) shows how the reach variation (pseudo-association 1) due to the development pattern HZ is about to miss, and how the ally character is about to lose to the enemy character D in the first confrontation image as the reach development background HH1. An image of the text ``Unfortunate!?'' and an image of the first defeat are displayed.

In the screen shown in (d), the reach variation due to the development pattern HZ is resumed (pseudo series 2), and in (e), in the reach development background HH2, the text image of "One Chance!" and the ally character are the enemy character D. A second confrontation image is displayed, and the output of the developed music D continues. In the screen shown in (e), it seems that the reach variation (pseudo chain 2) due to the development pattern HZ is likely to miss, and the ally character is likely to lose to the enemy character D in the second confrontation image with the reach development background HH1. An image of the text ``A shame again!?'' and a second defeat color image are displayed.

On the screen shown in (f), the reach fluctuation by the development pattern HZ is resumed (pseudo series 3, final fluctuation), and in the reach development background HH3, the character image "One more chance!" The image of the third confrontation is displayed, and the output of the developing music continues. At this time, unlike the jackpot super reach D, the pending display TH remains blue and does not change. On the screen shown in (g), it is displayed that the final fluctuation result due to the development pattern HZ is a combination that is out of reach, and the third defeat image in which the ally character is likely to lose to the enemy character D in the reach development background HH3 is displayed. An image of the words "Unfortunate!" is displayed, reinforcing the impression of defeat, and a loss notification sound is output along with the developing music D. On the screen shown in (h), the out-of-reach combination due to the development symbol HZ is displayed as the out-of-reach combination due to the main decorative symbol SZ, and the output of the development music D is stopped.

In this example, like the above-mentioned jackpot Super REIT E, after the out-of-reach combination is displayed as a result of the third re-variation (final variation) with the developed symbol HZ, the out-of-reach combination with the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed. At the timing when is displayed, the pending display TH changes from blue to rainbow color, and there is a pattern in which the fluctuation due to the developed symbol HZ is revived and becomes a jackpot, so at the last moment of the symbol fluctuation display (h) A ready-to-win effect can be shown in a state where the user expects the pending display TH to change from blue to rainbow color until the display of the missing main decorative pattern SZ ends. In addition, even if the pending display TH does not change to rainbow color on the missed screen of the main decorative pattern SZ shown in (h), the fluctuation due to the developed symbol HZ will be revived until the last moment of the symbol fluctuation display, resulting in a jackpot. It is possible to show reach performance while making people expect.

Next, an example of the execution of the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot super reach E will be explained with reference to FIG. Note that the pending display TH has been displayed in blue since the start of the fluctuation of the main decorative pattern SZ.

As shown in (a), in the reach display of the main decorative pattern SZ of the jackpot Super Reach E, the reach display does not indicate that it is Super Reach E, but instead shows as if it were Super Reach D, for example, "Super Reach E". A speech bubble image HD of "Reach D" is displayed, and normal music continues to be output. On the screen shown in (b), the image of the first confrontation in which the ally character confronts the enemy character D based on the reach variation (Pseudo-Run 1) due to the development pattern HZ and the reach development background HH1 is displayed, and the development is replaced with normal music. Music D is output. In the screen shown in (c), the reach variation (pseudo-association 1) due to the development pattern HZ is likely to miss, and the ally character is likely to lose to the enemy character D in the first confrontation image as the reach development background HH1. An image of the text ``Unfortunate!?'' and an image of the first defeat are displayed.

In the screen shown in (d), the reach variation due to the development pattern HZ is resumed (pseudo series 2), and in (e), in the reach development background HH2, the text image of "One Chance!" and the ally character are the enemy character D. A second confrontation image is displayed, and the output of the developed music D continues. In the screen shown in (e), it seems that the reach variation (pseudo chain 2) due to the development pattern HZ is likely to miss, and the ally character is likely to lose to the enemy character D in the second confrontation image with the reach development background HH2. An image of the text ``A shame again!?'' and a second defeat color image are displayed.

On the screen shown in (f), the reach fluctuation by the development pattern HZ is resumed (pseudo series 3, final fluctuation), and in the reach development background HH3, the character image "One more chance!" The third confrontation image is displayed, and the output of the development music D continues. At this time, the pending display TH remains blue, similar to the super reach D that is out of the front and back, and does not change. On the screen shown in (g), it is displayed that the result of the final fluctuation due to the development pattern HZ is a combination that is out of reach, and the 3rd losing color image in which the ally character is likely to lose to the enemy character D in the reach development background HH3 is displayed. An image of the words "Too bad!" that strengthens the impression of losing is displayed, and along with the output of the advanced music D, a failure notification sound is output.

On the screen shown in (h), the out-of-reach combination due to the developed pattern HZ is displayed as the out-of-reach combination due to the main decorative pattern SZ, the reach development background HH3 is returned to the normal background NH, the output of the development music D is stopped, It looks as if a series of symbol fluctuation displays will be finalized. Also, after a short period of time has elapsed after the output of the development music D is stopped, the output of the normal music is resumed, so that it feels like the screen is on standby until the next symbol variation display starts. Can be done. At this time, on the screen shown in (h), a specific pending change is performed in which the pending display TH changes from blue to a rainbow color indicating a confirmed jackpot. At this point, the player can recognize that the out-of-reach combination due to the main decorative symbol SZ has not been determined, and that the fluctuation of the developed symbol HZ will be restored and a jackpot will be achieved.

In the screen shown in (i), the reach variation due to the development pattern HZ is revived (restarted), and the revival background HH4 includes a text image of "Resurrection!" and an image of the ally character being revived and confronting the enemy character D. A variable screen is displayed and revival music is output. On the screen shown in (j), as a result of the revival of the reach variation by the developed symbol HZ, there is a jackpot combination by the developed symbol HZ, a text image of "Revival Victory!" as the resurrection background HH4, and an ally character's come-from-behind victory over the enemy character D. A resurrection victory image indicating this is displayed, and a jackpot notification sound is output. After this, although illustration is omitted, the jackpot combination by the developed symbol HZ is displayed as the jackpot combination by the main decorative symbol SZ, it is displayed that the series of symbol variation displays are confirmed as a jackpot, and a jackpot confirmation sound is output.

In this way, in Jackpot Super Reach E, players who have seen or know the execution example of the fluctuation pattern of Jackpot Super Reach E are shown a confrontation performance with out-of-reach combinations as a result of the reach development performance. Even if a losing color image is displayed in which the friendly character is likely to lose to the enemy character, the pending display TH will become a jackpot combination until the end of the display indicating that the result of the reach development effect by the development symbol HZ is out of reach. Even if the color suggests that the probability is low, even if the out-of-reach combination due to the developed pattern HZ is displayed, and the out-of-reach combination due to the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed, the out-of-reach combination due to the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed. Until the last moment of the symbol fluctuation display when the display of the losing combination is confirmed, there is an expectation that a pending change like the pending display pattern 7 will occur, or that the symbol variation due to the developed symbol HZ will be revived and become a jackpot. It is possible to show the reach effect while maintaining the condition.

The process of storing the jackpot random number counter C1 etc. in the reserved ball storage area performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 in step S705 described above is an example of the determination information acquisition means of the present invention. The jackpot determination process performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 in step S501 described above is an example of the determination means of the present invention. The third symbol display device 42 described above is an example of the display means of the present invention. The display variation pattern designation command setting process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 in step S2303 described above is an example of the variation pattern determining means of the present invention. The variable display mode determining process performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 in step S3004 described above is an example of the variable pattern execution means of the present invention. The suspension display pattern determination process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 in S1914 described above is an example of the suggestion effect determining means and the suspension change determining means of the present invention. The suspension display control process performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 in S3007 described above is an example of the suggestion effect execution means and the suspension change execution means of the present invention. The reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 described above is an example of the storage means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot lottery are activated by detecting ball entry at the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b. , a process of storing the count values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 in the reserved ball storage area (S705), and a jackpot determination process in the first symbol variation process that uses this count value to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot (S501). ), and a display including a symbol fluctuation display from when the main decorative symbol SZ starts to fluctuate until the main decorative symbol SZ stops at a combination indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process. If the judgment result indicates that the main decorative pattern SZ is stopped due to a winning combination from among the third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying effects and a plurality of variation patterns indicating the variation mode of symbol variation display, A winning variation pattern is determined, and if the judgment result indicates that the main decorative pattern SZ is stopped due to a winning combination, a winning variation pattern is determined, and after the main decorative pattern SZ is temporarily stopped due to a winning combination. If the determination result indicates that it has been decided to perform a variation restoration (special variation) in which the symbol variation display is stopped due to a winning combination, the CPU 551 executes a variation display mode setting process (S1903) to determine a special variation pattern. and a CPU 521 that performs symbol row variation start processing (S3105) that causes the third symbol display device 42 to execute symbol variation display according to the variation pattern determined by the variation display mode setting process. 45, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 selects one of a plurality of suggestion performances that suggest that the symbol variation display may be aligned in a winning combination, and is executed during the variation display of the main decorative symbol SZ. The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a hold display pattern determination process (S1914) that determines a predetermined suggestion effect, and causes the third symbol display device 42 to perform a hold display pattern determination process (S1914) that determines a predetermined suggestion effect. Display control processing (S3007) is performed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that when at least the jackpot super reach E is determined in the above-described pending display pattern determination process, the variation pattern determined in the variation display mode setting process may be the jackpot super reach E. It is decided to execute a variation revival suggestion performance (special suggestion performance) which suggests to the player that there is a possibility of a variation revival before the variation revival is executed. In addition, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the variable revival determined by the pending display pattern determination process after the jackpot super reach E is determined in the above-described pending display control process until the variable recovery is executed. Execute suggestive performance.

According to such a configuration, when the jackpot super reach E is determined, it is determined to execute the variable revival suggestion performance. A variable revival suggestion performance is executed after the jackpot super reach E is determined until the variable revival is executed. As a result, if the player notices the fluctuation revival suggestion performance and understands the content of the suggestion, he or she will realize that the determined fluctuation pattern may be the jackpot super reach E before the fluctuation revival is executed. be able to. Therefore, by noticing the fluctuating revival suggestion performance, the player maintains the expectation that the jackpot super reach E has been determined from the time the fluctuating revival suggestion performance is executed until the fluctuating revival is executed. You can continue to view the display performance while As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the display performance accompanied by the suggestive performance that suggests to the player the result of the determination regarding the game. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A1) below.

Further, the special variation is a revival jackpot variation (variation revival) in which the symbol variation display is temporarily stopped at a winning combination and then stopped at a winning combination. By noticing the resurrection jackpot performance, the player maintained a sense of expectation that the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation revival would be performed was determined from the execution of the resurrection jackpot performance until the execution of the fluctuation revival. You can continue to watch the display performance in any state. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A2) below.

In addition, before the special variation is executed, it is the timing from when the symbol variation display based on the jackpot super reach E is executed until the variation revival is executed during the symbol variation display, and the jackpot super reach E is determined. The period from when the special variation is executed is the timing from when the symbol variation display based on the jackpot super reach E is executed until when the variation revival is executed. As a result, by noticing the fluctuating revival suggestion performance, the player can enjoy the jackpot super reach E during the period from when the fluctuating revival suggestion performance is executed until the fluctuating revival is executed during the symbol fluctuation display based on the jackpot super reach E. It is possible to continue viewing the display performance while maintaining a sense of expectation that the decision has been made. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the display performance while the symbol variation display is being executed. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A4) below.

Further, the third symbol display device 42 is provided with a reserved ball storage area having a plurality of reserved areas capable of storing the count values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the variable type counters CS1 and CS2. When a count value is acquired, it is possible to display a pending display indicating that there is a possibility that the symbol fluctuation display based on the stored count value will be a winning combination, and the pending display pattern determination process When the fluctuation pattern determined by the mode setting process is jackpot super reach E, a fluctuation revival suggestion effect is executed using the relevant pending display TH (pending display) corresponding to the count value for which jackpot super reach E is determined. The suspension display control process executes a variable revival suggestion effect using the suspension display TH during a period from when the suspension display TH is displayed until when the fluctuation display is displayed. As a result, the player understands that this pending display TH may correspond to the jackpot super reach E by viewing the fluctuation revival suggestion performance using the pending display TH. As a result, after the player sees the variation revival suggestion performance using this pending display TH, until the variation revival is executed during the symbol variation display corresponding to this pending display TH, the player can reach the jackpot super reach. It is possible to continue viewing the display performance while maintaining a sense of expectation that E has been determined. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A5) below.

The reserved ball storage area has an execution area in which a count value corresponding to the symbol variation display being executed by the third symbol display device 42 is stored, and the third symbol display device 42 has a count value stored in the execution area. When stored, it is possible to display the pending display TH that suggests that the symbol fluctuation display based on the stored count value may be aligned in a winning combination, and in the pending display pattern determination process, a jackpot super reach. When E is determined, it is decided to execute a fluctuation revival suggestion effect using the relevant pending display TH corresponding to the jackpot super reach E, and in the pending display control process, the relevant pending display TH is displayed. In the meantime, a fluctuation revival suggestion performance is executed using the suspension display TH. As a result, the player understands that there is a possibility that this pending display TH corresponds to the jackpot super reach E by visually recognizing the fluctuation revival suggestion performance for the pending display TH. After visually confirming the fluctuation revival suggestion effect using the relevant pending display TH, while the symbol fluctuation display based on the relevant pending display TH is being executed, the jackpot super reach E is determined for the relevant pending display TH. You can continue to watch the display while maintaining your sense of anticipation. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A7) below.

In addition, the winning variation pattern (Jackpot Super Reach D) involves multiple main decorative symbols SZ starting to vary in front of the normal background NH that is displayed while the main decorative symbols SZ in the left, center, and right columns are not varying. and a reach development variation in which the development symbols HZ in the right column fluctuate in front of the reach development backgrounds HH1 to HH3 that are displayed while the development symbols HZ in the left and center columns are reaching through the normal variation; The winning variation pattern (missing super reach D) includes a winning stop where the main decorative symbols SZ in the left, center, and right columns are aligned in a winning combination after the reach development variation, and the winning variation pattern (missing super reach D) includes a normal variation, a reach development variation, After the reach development variation, the development pattern HZ in the right row stops at the out-of-reach combination in front of the reach development backgrounds HH1 to HH3, and after the out-of-reach stop, the out-of-reach combination with the main decorative pattern SZ occurs in front of the normal background NH. The special variation pattern (Jackpot Super Reach E) includes a normal variation, a reach development variation, an out-of-reach stop, and the main decoration of the left column, center column, and right column after the out-of-reach stop. The hold display control process includes a fluctuation revival in which symbols SZ are aligned in a winning combination (resurrection hit fluctuation), and when a jackpot super reach E is determined, an out-of-reach stop due to the development symbol HZ is displayed in front of the reach development background HH3. After being displayed and before the main decorative pattern SZ finishes displaying the stoppage in front of the normal background NH, a variation revival suggestion performance is executed.

As a result, the recovery of fluctuation in the symbol fluctuation display executed in the jackpot super reach E is similar to the out-of-reach stop due to the developed symbol HZ and the out-of-reach stop due to the decorative symbol SZ in the symbol fluctuation display executed in the out-hit super reach D. be recognized. The fluctuation revival suggestion performance is executed after the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the reach development background HH3 and before the end of the out-of-reach stop display in front of the normal background NH, so the symbol fluctuation display is in the out-of-reach pattern. During a period when the game has ended and the player is not aware that there will be a revival effect after this, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of a winning combination. Therefore, for players who have seen or are aware of Jackpot Super Reach E, not only Jackpot Super Reach E but also out-of-reach stops such as Missing Super Reach A to D are at the forefront of the reach development background HH3. Even if the stop is displayed in front of the normal background NH after it is displayed, the fluctuation revival is maintained until the last moment of the symbol fluctuation display, while maintaining the expectation that the fluctuation revival suggestion effect will occur. It is possible to show a display performance including a symbol variation display. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in a display performance including a symbol variation display having a variation revival. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A8) below.

Also, when the jackpot super reach E is executed, the following is a mode in which the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the development pattern HZ in front of the reach development background HH3, and then the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the main decorative pattern SZ normal background NH. For example, when a losing variation pattern such as Super Reach D that is off the front or back or Super Reach D that is off other than the front or back is executed, the out of reach stop by the development pattern HZ is displayed in front of the reach development background HH3, and then the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed. This is the same as the manner in which the off-stop is displayed in front of the normal background NH. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A9) below.

According to such a configuration, a symbol variation display of a special variation pattern such as the jackpot super reach E is actually executed, but the main decorative symbol SZ and the developed symbol HZ in the missed super reach D are changed and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute a specific pending change that changes the pending display TH to a rainbow color at a timing that the player recognizes as the end of the symbol variation display of the losing pattern. As a result, the symbol variation display can be shown to the player while maintaining the expectation that a specific pending variation such as jackpot super reach E will occur until the end of the symbol variation display.

In addition, when jackpot super reach E is executed, the normal that is displayed from the time when the out-of-reach stop due to the development symbol HZ is displayed in front of the reach development background HH3 until the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the normal background NH. Background images such as the background NH and development backgrounds HH1 to HH3 are used to display a development pattern in front of the reach development background HH3 when a losing variation pattern such as Super Reach D that is out of the front or back or Super Reach D that is out of the front or back is executed. It is the same as the background images such as the normal background NH and developed backgrounds HH1 to HH3 that are displayed from when the out-of-reach stop due to HZ is displayed until the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the normal background NH. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A10) described later.

According to such a configuration, a symbol variation display of a special variation pattern such as the jackpot super reach E is actually executed, but a background like the normal background NH or the developed background HH1 to HH3 in the missed super reach D is displayed. Since the same background image as the image is displayed, the specific suggestion performance (special suggestion performance) is executed at the timing when the player recognizes that it is the end of the symbol variation display of the out-of-order pattern if inferred from the background image. can do. As a result, even if the background image is content that makes the player guess a winning pattern, the expectation is that a specific pending change like jackpot super reach E will occur until the end of the symbol change display. It is possible to show a symbol variation display while maintaining the .

In addition, the pending display pattern determination process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is selected from among a plurality of pending change patterns in which suggestive effects are performed multiple times during one symbol variation display. Determining a predetermined pending change pattern. The hold display control process performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display the predetermined hold change pattern determined by the hold display pattern determination process. A hold change that is performed multiple times in a hold change pattern that includes a specific hold change that changes the hold display TH to a rainbow color is a hold change that is performed before the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the reach development backgrounds HH1 to 3 ( After the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the reach development background HH3 and before the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the normal background NH, the pending display TH changes from blue to rainbow color. The specific pending change that changes suggests that there is a higher possibility that the main decorative patterns SZ will be aligned in a winning combination. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A11) described later.

According to such a configuration, although the symbol variation display of the jackpot super reach E is actually being executed, it appears that the symbol variation display of the miss super reach D is being executed, and the symbol variation display is executed. The pending change pattern that is executed during display is limited to a pending change (change from white to blue) in which there is a low possibility that multiple symbols will form a winning combination. Even if it is guessed, it is possible to execute a specific pending change in which the pending display TH changes to a rainbow color at a timing that is recognized as the end of the symbol variation display of the super reach D. As a result, even if the pending change pattern is content that makes players guess a winning pattern, players will feel the expectation that a specific pending change like Jackpot Super Reach E will occur until the end of the symbol change display. It is possible to show a symbol variation display while maintaining the .

In addition, the specific suggestion effect that changes the pending display TH to a rainbow color is a specific win suggestion effect that suggests that it is certain that the main decorative symbols SZ in the left, center, and right columns will form a winning combination. . Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A12) below. According to such a configuration, the main decorations in the left column, center column, and right column are By suggesting that it is certain that the symbols SZ will be aligned in a winning combination, the pending display TH, such as jackpot super reach E, will change to a rainbow color indicating a confirmed jackpot until the end of the symbol variation display. It is possible to show the symbol variation display while maintaining the sense of expectation.

In addition, the pending display control process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is performed during a symbol variation display executed in a special variation pattern such as jackpot super reach E, while a missed stop is displayed in front of the normal background NH. A specific pending change is executed to change the pending display TH to a rainbow color. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A13) below. According to such a configuration, when a symbol variation display executed with a special variation pattern such as jackpot super reach E is displayed with a missed stop in front of the normal background NH, it appears as if the symbol variation display ended with a missed pattern. By executing a specific hold change that changes the hold display TH to a rainbow color, even if the player is aware of the timing, even if the symbol change display is out of order, it will be possible to continue until the end of the symbol change display. The symbol variation display can be shown while maintaining the expectation that the pending display TH will change to a rainbow color indicating confirmation of the jackpot, such as jackpot super reach E.

In addition, in the hold display control process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262, in the symbol variation display executed in a special variation pattern such as jackpot super reach E, the background image displayed behind the out-of-reach stop is A specific pending change is executed to change the pending display TH to a rainbow color approximately at the same time as the return from the reach development background HH3 to the normal background NH. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A14) below. According to such a configuration, in a symbol variation display executed with a special variation pattern such as jackpot super reach E, the background image displayed behind the out-of-reach stop returns from the reach development background HH3 to the normal background NH. At this timing, the player recognizes that the symbol fluctuation display has ended with a missed pattern, but by executing a specific suspension change that changes the suspension display TH to a rainbow color at this timing, the symbol fluctuation display can be changed. The symbol variation display can be shown while maintaining the expectation that the pending display TH will change to a rainbow color indicating confirmation of the jackpot until the end, such as the jackpot super reach E.

In addition, in the pending display control process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262, in the symbol variation display executed in a special variation pattern such as jackpot super reach E, the background displayed behind the out-of-reach stop is A specific pending change that changes the pending display TH to a rainbow color may be executed after the timing of returning from the reach development background HH3 to the normal background NH and while the normal background NH is being displayed. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A15) below. According to such a configuration, in the symbol variation display executed with a special variation pattern such as the jackpot super reach E, the timing is changed from the timing when the reach development failure screen returns to the normal screen displaying the failure combination in the main decorative pattern SZ. Later, while the normal background NH is being displayed, the symbol variation display ends with a missing pattern, and the player recognizes it as a standby screen until the next symbol variation display starts. However, by executing a specific suggestion effect at this timing, you will be able to keep your eyes peeled until the very end of the symbol fluctuation display, and even if you think that the symbol fluctuation display is completely finished, there is a possibility that something will still happen. It is possible to give an impression to the player. As a result, it is possible to show the symbol variation display while maintaining the expectation that the pending display TH, such as the jackpot super reach E, will change to a rainbow color indicating confirmation of the jackpot.

Further, the third symbol display device 42 starts the fluctuation in a state where the symbol composed of the number part SZa is combined with the symbol composed of the decoration part SZb corresponding to the number part SZa, and then performs the jackpot determination process. It is possible to display a display effect including a symbol fluctuation display until it stops with the combination indicating the determination result in (S501). In the above-described suspension display control process, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the winning combinations except for the symbol whose symbol variation display is composed of a plurality of number parts SZa, except for the symbol composed of the remaining number part SZa. After the symbol consisting of the remaining number part SZa stops so as to become an out-of-reach combination in the all-in-one reach development state, the symbol is made up of the number part SZa indicating that the symbol is out of super reach. When the symbol variation display stops in a state where the symbol is combined with the symbol constituted by the decorative part SZb, a variation revival suggestion performance is executed.

According to this configuration, after the symbol variation display becomes out of reach due to a super reach out combination of the symbols made up of the number part SZa, the symbol made up of the number part SZa indicating the out of super reach is displayed in the decorative part. When the symbol variation display stops while it is combined with a symbol consisting of SZb, the combination of the symbol variation display being erroneous has been confirmed, or the next symbol consisting of a plurality of number parts SZa will be combined with the decoration part SZb. Since the timing is such that the player thinks that it is a waiting period before the fluctuation starts in the combined state, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the special fluctuation pattern at a timing when the player does not expect that the suggestive effect will be performed. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that In addition, after the symbol fluctuation display becomes out of super reach due to an out-of-reach combination of the symbols made up of the number part SZa, the symbol made up of the number part SZa indicating that the number part SZa is out of super reach is combined with the symbol made up of the decorative part SZb. Until the last moment of the symbol fluctuation display when the symbol fluctuation display stops in the state where the symbol fluctuation display stops, the display effect including the symbol fluctuation display can be shown while maintaining the expectation that the fluctuation pattern is the jackpot super reach E. can. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the symbol variation display accompanied by a suggestive effect that suggests to the player the result of the determination regarding the game. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (B1) below.

In addition, in the above-described suspension display control process, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines that when the variation revival suggestion performance is determined by the suspension display pattern determination process, the symbol variation display is performed using the remaining main decorative symbols SZ. The display mode when the winning variation pattern is determined in the reach development effect after a reach with all the winning combinations except for one main decorative symbol SZ is established (for example, "You did it!" in the reach development background HH3) character image and a victory image in which an ally character defeats an enemy character). A variation revival suggestion performance is executed from the time when it is made recognizable to the player (a character image such as "Unfortunate!") until the special variation is executed. It should be noted that the reach development background HH3 is a character display effect that uses friendly characters and enemy characters without using text images, and has a display mode that is different from the display mode when the winning fluctuation pattern is determined. It may be recognized.

According to such a configuration, the display mode is different from the display mode when the winning fluctuation pattern is determined in the reach development background HH3 in the reach development production (for example, the third loss color when the ally character is likely to lose to the enemy character). If it is possible for the player to distinguish between the image and the text image of ``Unfortunate!'' that strengthens the impression of losing, the player may not be able to identify the pattern when the symbol fluctuation display is aligned in a winning combination. Since the timing can make the player think that the player is about to give up, it is possible to suggest to the player that the fluctuation pattern may be a jackpot super reach E. As a result, the display mode differs from the display mode when a winning fluctuation pattern is determined in the display effect (for example, a third losing color image where an ally character is about to lose to an enemy character, and a “disappointing image” that strengthens the impression of losing). !'' character image) until the time when the fluctuation is restored, the expectation that the fluctuation pattern is jackpot super reach E is maintained. It is possible to show a display performance including a symbol variation display. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the symbol variation display accompanied by the reach display effect that indicates to the player the result of the determination regarding the game. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (C1) described later.

In addition, after a reach is established, when it is made possible for the player to discern that the display format is different from the display format when the winning variation pattern is determined in the display performance, the winning variation pattern in the reach development production is Specific display information that allows the player to identify that the display mode is different from the display mode that has been determined (for example, the third time when the friendly character is likely to lose to the enemy character in the reach development background HH3) This is when an image of defeat and an image of the words "Unfortunate!" (which strengthens the impression of defeat) are displayed. According to such a configuration, specific display information (for example, reach development background In HH3, when the 3rd losing color image (which shows that the friendly character is about to lose to the enemy character and the text image of "Unfortunate!" that strengthens the impression of losing) is displayed, the fluctuation pattern may be a jackpot super reach E. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a certain gender. Therefore, even after the player can identify that the display format is different from the display format when the winning fluctuation pattern has been determined in the reach display performance, until the fluctuation restoration is executed, the fluctuation pattern remains unchanged. A display performance including a reach display performance can be shown while maintaining the feeling of expectation for the jackpot super reach E. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the symbol variation display accompanied by the reach display performance. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (C2) below.

In addition, the above-mentioned specific display information includes out-of-reach display information (for example, out-of-reach display information that allows the player to identify that the remaining symbol is a display mode in which the remaining symbol is arranged in an out-of-reach combination in the reach development effect (for example, in the reach development background HH3, These are an image of the character losing for the third time, showing that the character is about to lose to the enemy character, and a text image of ``Unfortunate!'' that strengthens the impression of losing. According to such a configuration, the specific display information is out-of-reach display information that allows the player to identify that the remaining symbol is a display mode in which the remaining symbol is arranged in an out-of-reach combination in the reach development effect. It is possible to suggest to the player that the fluctuation pattern may be a jackpot super reach E at the timing when the player is disappointed after seeing the out-of-reach display information. Therefore, even after the out-of-reach display information is displayed in the reach development performance until the fluctuation recovery is executed, the reach development performance can be performed while maintaining the expectation that the fluctuation pattern is the jackpot super reach E. It is possible to show a display effect including. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the symbol variation display accompanied by the reach display effect. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (C3) below.

In Example 1, the specific suggestion effect was a specific pending change in which the pending display TH changes to a rainbow color, but in Example 2, the specific suggestion effect is not a specific pending change, but a normal screen (main decorative pattern). The difference is that the background image NH displayed behind the main decorative pattern SZ in the off-screen SZ) is a specific background change that changes to a special background image. Hereinafter, points different from Example 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 44. Reference is also made to the above description and drawings as appropriate.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines background display patterns 1 to 4 using the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553 and the background display pattern selection table shown in FIG. As shown in step S2304, the determined background display pattern is converted into a display background display pattern designation command.

In accordance with the display background display pattern designation command received from the sub-control device 262, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the display image control process shown in step S3006 in FIG. Controls the display of the background image to be displayed.

The background change pattern determined when the jackpot super reach E is determined is background display pattern 4 as shown in FIG. Background display pattern 4 in this embodiment is a timing t2f at which the result of the third re-variation (final variation) in the reach development effect is displayed to be out of reach due to the development symbol HZ, as shown in FIG. 35(c). In the reach development background HH3, after the third defeat image in which the friendly character is about to lose to the enemy character in the third confrontation is displayed, the resurrection background HH4 indicating that the variation due to the development pattern HZ will be revived is displayed. Before the symbol change display starts, the normal background NH displayed at the start of the symbol variation display is set to be switched to a specific normal background SNH that is at least partially different. The specific normal background SNH is, for example, a background image in which the color of the normal background NH displayed at the start of the symbol variation display is replaced with a rainbow color that suggests a guaranteed jackpot.

An example of executing the jackpot super reach E of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In FIG. 44, the explanation starts from the screen corresponding to FIG. 43(d).

In the third symbol display device 42, as shown in (a), the third re-variation (final variation) is started, and as shown in (b), the out-of-reach pattern due to the developed symbol HZ in the final variation of the reach development effect is started. After the out-of-reach image including the combination and the out-of-reach development background HH3 (third losing color image) is displayed for about 2 seconds, as shown in (c), the out-of-reach combination due to the development pattern HZ is changed to the out-of-reach combination due to the main decorative pattern SZ. It is switched to the out-of-reach combination, and the reach development background HH3 (the third losing color image) is switched to the specific normal background SNH. After the out-of-reach combination by the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed on the specific normal background SNH, the fluctuation of the pattern by the developed pattern HZ is revived against the background of the revival background HH4 as shown in (d), and as shown in (e) With the revival background image HH4 as a background, a jackpot combination using the developed symbols HZ is displayed, and a jackpot combination using the main decorative symbols SZ is displayed as shown in (f).

In this way, in the jackpot super reach E of the second embodiment, the results of the reach development effect are shown to players who have seen or know the execution example of the variation pattern of the jackpot super reach E of the second embodiment. Even if a losing color image is displayed in which an ally character is likely to lose to an enemy character in a confrontation performance along with a combination that is out of reach, the relevant character will not be displayed until the end of the display indicating that the result of the reach development performance by development pattern HZ is out of reach. Even if the pending display TH is a color that suggests that the possibility of a jackpot combination is low, if an out-of-reach combination due to the development symbol HZ is displayed, and then an out-of-reach combination due to the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed. However, the specific normal background SNH is displayed until the final moment of the symbol variation display when the display of the out-of-reach combination by the main decorative symbol SZ is confirmed, and the symbol variation by the developed symbol HZ is revived and becomes a jackpot. You can show reach performance while maintaining expectations.

The display background display pattern designation command setting process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 in step S2304 described above is an example of the background composition image determining means of the present invention. The display image control process performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 in step S3006 described above is an example of the background composition image display execution means.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 generates an image that suggests that there is a possibility that a plurality of symbols may be aligned in a winning combination. The display control device 45 is equipped with a background composition image determination function (display background display pattern designation command setting process (S2304)) that determines a predetermined background composition image from among a plurality of background composition images that constitute the rear side. The CPU 521 has a background composition image display execution function (display image control process (S3006)) that causes the third symbol display device 42 to display an image constituting a predetermined background composition image determined by the background composition image function, and The component image determination function is configured to determine whether, at least when the jackpot super reach E is determined, the developed symbol HZ is a jackpot among the plurality of background component images between the time the jackpot super reach E is determined and the fluctuation revival is executed. It is decided to display a specific normal background SNH (specific background configuration image) that suggests that there is a high possibility that the combination will be complete. Thereby, even if the symbol variation display is displayed in an incorrect combination, the symbol variation display can be shown in a state where the user expects the specific normal background SNH to be displayed until the end of the symbol variation display. Such a configuration is an example of the gaming machine described in (A17).

In addition, the background composition image determination function is a display background display that determines a predetermined background pattern to be executed during the symbol variation display as a predetermined suggestion effect from among a plurality of background patterns displayed as the background of the symbol variation display. This is a pattern designation command setting process (S2304), and the background composition image display execution function is a display that causes the third symbol display device 42 to execute a predetermined background pattern determined by the display background display pattern designation command setting process (S2304). This is image control processing (S3006). In the display background display pattern designation command setting process, when the jackpot super reach E is determined, the developed symbols HZ can be aligned in a winning combination after the out-of-reach stop is displayed and before the out-of-reach stop is displayed. A specific background change is determined to change a reach development background NH3 which does not suggest that there is a probability into a specific normal background SNH which suggests that there is a possibility that the main decorative patterns SZ may be arranged in a winning combination. According to such a configuration, even when the symbol variation display is displayed in an incorrect combination, the symbol variation display is performed in a state in which a specific background change in which the reach development background HH3 changes to the specific normal background SNH is expected until the end of the symbol variation display. can be shown. Such a configuration is an example of the gaming machine described in (A18).

In Example 1, the specific suggestion effect was a specific pending change in which the pending display TH changes to a rainbow color, but in Example 3, the specific suggestion effect is not a specific pending change but a special variation pattern. Identification of at least one main decorative pattern SZ displayed on the normal screen (outside screen of the main decorative pattern SZ) performed in a pattern variation display that is performed with a decoration different from the decoration of the normal main decorative pattern SZ The difference is that this is a specific pattern change that is displayed as the main decorative pattern SSZ. Hereinafter, points different from Examples 1 and 2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 45. Also, reference is made to the above description and drawings as appropriate.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines a symbol variation display pattern using the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553 and the symbol variation display pattern selection table shown in FIG. As shown in S2303, the determined symbol variation display pattern is converted into a display variation pattern designation command.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 varies s, the main decorative pattern SZ, and the developed pattern HZ in the variable display mode determination process shown in step S3004 of FIG. Performs display control.

When the display variation pattern designation command received from the sub-control device 262 is symbol variation display pattern 4 corresponding to 8R probability variation jackpot super reach E or 16R probability variation jackpot super reach E, CPU 521 of display control device 45 selects a winning combination. A specific pattern change is executed in which some of the constituent main decorative patterns SZ are displayed in place of a specific main decorative pattern SSZ that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot combination. That is, in the specific symbol change, the symbol variation display pattern 4 in the jackpot super reach E shown in FIG. At timing t2g when the display switches from the display to the display of the out-of-reach combination with the main decorative pattern SZ, the main decorative pattern SZ constituting the out-of-reach combination is replaced with a specific main decorative pattern SSZ that suggests that it will be a jackpot combination. . The out-of-reach combination composed of the main decorative pattern SZ and the specific main decorative pattern SSZ continues to be displayed until the display of the out-of-reach combination in the main decorative pattern SZ is finished. Thereafter, the missing combination composed of the main decorative pattern SZ and the suggested pattern SZ2 is switched to the revival of symbol variation by the developed symbol HZ at timing t2h when the revival performance starts.

The specific main decorative pattern SSZ may be set to be displayed in place of the main decorative pattern SZ when a reach is established in the jackpot normal reach A. In addition, in the jackpot super reach A, the development symbol HZ may be changed to a rainbow color and displayed in the final variation of the reach development effect. By setting in this manner, it becomes easy to suggest to the player that the special pattern change in which the main decorative pattern SZ changes to the specific main decorative pattern SSZ in the jackpot super reach E will definitely result in a jackpot combination.

Next, an example of the execution of the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot super reach E in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. Since the jackpot super reach E of this embodiment is different from the jackpot super reach E of embodiment 1 in FIG. 45(c), this point will be mainly explained.

In Examples 1 and 2, the third symbol display device 42 displays the combinations "7," "7," and "6" of the developed symbols HZ in the final variation, which are out of reach development, for about 2 seconds, and then displays the out-of-reach development of the main decorative pattern SZ. The combinations were switched to "7", "7", and "6". In this example, as shown in (d), "7" in the left column L and "7" in the center column M are displayed as the main decorative pattern SZ, but "6" in the right column M is a jackpot. A specific pattern change is performed that is displayed as a specific main decorative pattern SSZ that indicates that the combination is certain. In the specific main decorative pattern SZ2, the number part SZa and the decoration part SZb are colored in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the jackpot super reach E of the third embodiment, the results of the reach development effect are shown to players who have seen or know the execution example of the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot super reach E of the third embodiment. Even if a losing color image is displayed in which an ally character is likely to lose to an enemy character in a confrontation performance along with a combination that is out of reach, the relevant character will not be displayed until the end of the display indicating that the result of the reach development performance using the development pattern HZ is out of reach. Even if the pending display TH is a color that suggests that the possibility of a jackpot combination is low, or even if an out-of-reach combination due to the development symbol HZ is displayed, and then an out-of-reach combination due to the decorative symbol SZ is displayed. , until the last moment of the symbol variation display when the display of the out-of-reach combination with the main decorative pattern SZ is confirmed, the specific main decorative pattern SSZ is included in the out-of-reach combination with the main decorative pattern SZ, and the developed pattern HZ It is possible to show the reach effect while maintaining the expectation that the symbol fluctuation will return and result in a jackpot.

The display background display pattern designation command setting process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 in step S2304 described above is an example of the background image determining means of the present invention. The display image control processing performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 in step S3006 described above is an example of the background pattern execution means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the variation revival suggestion performance is performed when one of the plurality of symbols constituting the losing combination in the main decorative pattern SZ, for example, the right side corresponding to the missing symbol. This is a specific pattern change in which the main decorative pattern SZ in the row M is replaced with a specific main decorative pattern SSZ in which the decorative part SZb is decorated with rainbow colors that suggest that there is a possibility of a jackpot combination. Such a configuration is an example of the gaming machine described in (A19). According to such a configuration, even when a missing screen is displayed in the symbol variation display, a symbol change in which the main decorative pattern SZ constituting the missing combination changes to the specific main decorative pattern SSZ is expected until the end of the symbol variation display. You can show a symbol variation display in the state.

A specific advance suggestion effect suggesting that the specific pending change will be executed may be performed before the specific pending change is started. This will be explained below with reference to FIG.

In the variable display mode determination process shown in step S3004 in FIG. 32, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner corresponding to the variable pattern indicated by the display variable pattern designation command received from the sub-control device 262. Determine the aspect. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 uses the symbol variation display pattern selection table described with reference to FIG. 9 to determine one variation pattern corresponding to the display variation pattern designation command.

In the variation pattern 4 corresponding to the jackpot super reach E in Example 1, the development symbol HZ is set to be displayed in the final variation in the reach development effect, and the result of the final variation is as shown in FIG. 43(g). As a result, combinations of out-of-reach combinations with developed symbols HZ were displayed. In this embodiment, in the variation pattern 4 corresponding to the jackpot super reach E, when displaying the out-of-reach combination as a result of the final variation, the developed symbol HZ of 1 (the developed symbol that stops at the end) that constitutes the out-of-reach combination is displayed. HZ) is set to be displayed as a specific developed symbol SHZ that is at least partially different from other developed symbols HZ. In addition, when the display variation pattern designation command is jackpot super reach E, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 selects variation pattern 4 including the specific development symbol SHZ as in the present embodiment, or selects variation pattern 4 as in the first embodiment. It may be determined by lottery whether the variation pattern 4 does not include the specific developed symbol SHZ.

The specific development symbol SHZ is a symbol that indicates to the player whether or not a specific pending change in which the pending change TH changes to a rainbow color is to be executed, depending on its display mode. For example, if the specific development pattern SHZ is a combination of the development pattern HZ and the character "Change?" expressed in kanji, this indicates that the specific pending change is certain to be executed, and the specific development pattern If the symbol SHZ is, for example, a combination of the developed symbol HZ and the character "Henka?" expressed in hiragana, it suggests that the specific pending change will not be executed. In addition, in the configuration that determines whether or not to use a variation pattern that includes the specific development symbol SHZ as described above, if a symbol that is a combination of the characters "change?" expressed in kanji is displayed, the specific development symbol SHZ is It is set so that there is a high possibility that the change will be executed, and if a symbol that combines the characters "Henka?" expressed in hiragana is displayed, the possibility that the specific pending change will be executed is low. May be set.

Next, an example of the execution of the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot super reach E and the lose super reach D in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

In the jackpot super reach E, the result of the third re-variation (final variation) in the reach development performance shown in (a) is displayed as a combination of out-of-reach by the development symbol HZ shown in (b). At this time, the developed pattern HZ on the left and center displays the numbers "7" and "7", and the developed pattern HZ on the right, which stops at the end, is the number "6" and the character "Change?" expressed in kanji. A specific development pattern SHZ "6 changes?" in which are combined is displayed. After displaying the out-of-reach combination "7", "7", and "6 change?" due to this development pattern HZ and specific development pattern SHZ, the out-of-reach combination due to development pattern HZ and specific development pattern SHZ is displayed as shown in (c). The combination "7" "7" "6 change?" is switched to the out-of-reach combination "7" "7" "6" by the main decorative pattern SZ, and the reach development background HH3 is switched to the normal background NH and the main decoration An out-of-reach screen due to the symbol SZ is displayed, and on this out-of-reach screen, a specific pending change in which the pending display TH changes from blue to rainbow color is displayed, and as shown in (d), the variation due to the developed symbol HZ has been restored. Later, it becomes a big hit.

In the out-of-reach super reach D, the result of the third re-variation (final variation) in the reach development performance shown in (a) is displayed as a combination of out-of-reach by the development symbol HZ shown in (e). At this time, the developed symbols HZ on the left and center display the numbers "7" and "7", and the developed symbol HZ on the right, which stops at the end, displays the number "6" and "Henka?" written in hiragana. A specific development pattern SHZ "6 Henka?" in which letters are combined is displayed. After the out-of-reach combination due to this development pattern HZ and specific development pattern SHZ is displayed, "7", "7", and "6?" are displayed, the out-of-reach combination due to development pattern HZ and specific development pattern SHZ is displayed as shown in (f). The combination "7" "7" "6?" is switched to the out-of-reach combination "7" "7" "6" by the main decorative pattern SZ, the reach development background HH3 is switched to the normal background NH, An out-of-reach screen with the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed, but in this out-of-reach screen, the pending display TH remains blue and does not change. In (f), the combination of out-of-reach based on the main decorative pattern SZ is determined.

In this way, in the jackpot super reach E of Example 4, when displaying an out-of-reach combination of development symbols HZ as a result of the reach development effect, depending on the type of specific development symbol SHZ that constitutes the out-of-reach combination, , it is suggested whether or not a specific pending change is to be executed in the pending display TH. As a result, after an out-of-reach combination is displayed due to the development symbol HZ as a result of the reach development effect, before the variation due to the main decorative symbol SZ is restored, the combination due to the main decorative symbol SZ, which does not indicate the confirmation of the symbol variation display, is displayed. During the period of reach development performance, it is recognized whether to return to the out-of-reach screen and a specific pending change is performed, or whether to return to the out-of-reach screen with the main decorative symbol SZ indicating confirmation of the symbol variation display and confirm the symbol variation display. can do. In other words, it is possible to diversify the production mode (game nature) leading to the specific pending change.

The variable display mode determining process performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 in step S3004 described above is an example of the advance suggestion effect determining means of the present invention. The display image control process performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 in step S3006 described above is an example of the advance suggestion effect execution means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the symbol variation display including the specific developed symbol SHZ that suggests execution of the specific pending change of the pending display TH is selected from the symbol variation display pattern selection table. If a symbol fluctuation display pattern including a specific developed symbol SHZ is determined by the advance suggestion performance determination function (fluctuation display mode determination process (S3004)) that determines the pattern, and the fluctuation display mode determination process, the symbol fluctuation display pattern The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the advance suggestion performance execution function (display image control processing (S3006)) to display on the third symbol display device 42, and in the fluctuation display mode determination processing, the fluctuation corresponding to the jackpot super reach E is provided. When pattern 4 is determined, as a specific advance suggestion performance executed before the fluctuation revival suggestion performance, an out-of-reach combination due to the development symbol HZ is displayed, and an out-of-reach combination due to the development symbol HZ is displayed. It is decided to perform a specific advance suggestion performance in which one of the development symbols HZ constituting the combination is displayed as a specific development symbol SHZ suggesting that a fluctuation revival suggestion performance is to be executed. Such a configuration is an example of the gaming machine described in (A20).

According to such a configuration, even when the jackpot super reach E is determined, after the out-of-reach combination due to the development symbol HZ is displayed as a result of the reach development effect, until the return to the out-of-reach screen due to the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed. This is not only due to the game nature of not knowing whether or not the variation revival suggestion effect will be executed (whether or not the variation due to the developed pattern HZ will be revived and become a jackpot), but also when the jackpot super reach E is determined. In this case, if a specific advance suggestion effect is executed at the timing when the out-of-reach screen due to the development symbol HZ is displayed, the variation revival suggestion production will be executed (the variation caused by the development symbol HZ will be revived and a jackpot will occur). Since the game feature of understanding the above is added, it is possible to diversify the game feature of the reach effect in which a variation pattern in which the variation due to the developed symbol HZ is revived and becomes a jackpot is executed.

In addition, in this fluctuation display mode determination process, when the fluctuation pattern 4 corresponding to the jackpot super reach E is determined, the out-of-reach combination due to the developed symbol HZ is displayed at the timing when the out-of-reach combination due to the developed symbol HZ is displayed. A first specific advance suggestion effect is performed in which one of the development patterns HZ constituting the development pattern HZ is displayed as a specific development pattern SHZ that includes a pattern of "change?" expressed in kanji that suggests that a specific pending change is likely to be executed. When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern 3 corresponding to the out-of-reach super reach D is determined, at the timing when the out-of-reach combination due to the development symbol HZ is displayed, a hiragana character indicating that the specific suggestion effect is difficult to be executed is displayed. It may be determined to perform a second specific advance suggestion performance that is displayed as a specific development pattern SHZ including the displayed symbol "Hello?". Such a configuration is an example of the gaming machine described in (A21).

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of the specific developed symbol SHZ that is executed at the timing when the out-of-reach combination of developed symbols It also adds the gameplay of being able to see whether fluctuations due to HZ are likely to return and result in a jackpot, thus diversifying the gameplay of the reach production in which a fluctuation pattern in which fluctuations due to the development symbol HZ return and result in a jackpot is executed. can.

The specific advance suggestion effect that suggests that the specific pending change is to be executed before the specific pending change is started may be performed in a manner different from that in the fourth embodiment. This will be explained below with reference to FIG.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses the variation pattern specification command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553 and the balloon display pattern specification command (not shown) to specify the display balloon display pattern shown in step S2305 of FIG. 31 described above. In the command setting process, a balloon display pattern for displaying the balloon image HD on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 at a predetermined timing during symbol variation display is determined. Specifically, one balloon image display pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command is determined using a balloon image display pattern selection table (not shown) in which the fluctuation pattern designation command and the balloon image HD are associated with each other. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 converts the determined balloon display pattern into a display balloon display pattern designation command.

In the present embodiment, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot super reach E, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes a specific speech bubble display pattern including the display of a specific speech bubble image SHD that suggests the execution of a specific pending change. Determine. The specific speech bubble display pattern is, for example, a pattern in which a speech bubble image HD consisting of "Super reach!" is displayed when a reach is achieved by the main decorative pattern SZ, and a specific speech bubble image SHD is displayed at a timing before executing a specific hold change described later. It is. Note that, similarly to the fourth embodiment, execution of a specific speech bubble display pattern may be determined by lottery.

In accordance with the display balloon display pattern designation command received from the sub-control device 262, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 changes the balloon image HD to the third symbol display device 42 in the auxiliary effect determination process shown in step S3005 of FIG. 32 described above. The display is controlled to be inserted at the lower right of the display screen 42a. In this embodiment, when the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives a specific speech balloon display pattern, it displays a specific speech balloon image SHD at a timing to be described later.

The specific balloon image HD is an image that indicates to the player whether or not a specific pending change in which the pending change TH changes to a rainbow color is to be executed, depending on its display mode. For example, if the specific speech bubble image SHD is a speech bubble that says "Change?" expressed in kanji and hiragana, this indicates that it is certain that the specific pending change will be executed, and if the specific speech balloon image SHD is, for example, only hiragana. If it is a speech bubble that says "Do you want to change?", it indicates that the specific pending change will not be executed. In addition, if the specific speech bubble display pattern is determined by lottery as described above, if the speech bubble says "Change?" written in kanji and hiragana, there is a high possibility that the specific pending change will be executed. If it is a speech bubble that suggests something like this and says "Do you want to change?" written only in hiragana, it may be set so that the possibility that the specific pending change will be executed is low.

Next, an example of the execution of the variation pattern of the jackpot super reach E and the lose super reach D in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG.

In the jackpot super reach E, the result of the third re-variation (final variation) in the reach development performance shown in (a) is displayed as a combination of out-of-reach by the development symbol HZ shown in (b). After displaying the out-of-reach combination due to the developed pattern HZ for about 2 seconds, as shown in (c), the out-of-reach combination due to the developed pattern HZ and the reach development background HH3 gradually disappear, and the out-of-reach combination due to the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed. A transition screen appears in which out-of-place combinations and the normal background NH gradually appear. At the timing when this transition screen is displayed, a specific speech bubble image SHD consisting of "Change?" expressed in kanji and hiragana is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 42a. The timing at which the specific speech bubble image SHD is displayed may be at the same time as switching to the transition screen, or may be while the transition screen is being displayed. After the specific speech bubble image SHD expressed in kanji and hiragana is displayed, the transition screen shifts to a normal screen in which a combination of out-of-reach by the main decorative pattern SZ shown in (d) and a normal background NH are displayed. On the normal screen, a specific pending change in which the pending display TH changes to a rainbow color is executed, and as shown in (e), after the variation due to the developed symbol HZ is restored, a jackpot is achieved.

In the out-of-reach super reach D, the result of the third re-variation (final variation) in the reach development effect shown in (a) is displayed as a combination of out-of-reach by the developed symbol HZ shown in (f), and the reach by the developed symbol HZ is displayed. After displaying the winning combination for about 2 seconds, at the timing when the transition screen shown in (g) is being displayed, a specific speech bubble image SHD that says "Do you want to change?" is displayed in only hiragana at the lower right of the display screen 42a. is displayed. After the specific speech bubble image SHD expressed only in hiragana is displayed, the transition screen transitions to a normal screen shown in (h). On the normal screen, the pending display TH remains blue and does not change. In (h), the combination of out-of-reach based on the main decorative pattern SZ is determined.

In this way, in the jackpot super reach E of Example 5, depending on the type of specific speech bubble image SHD displayed when transitioning from the out-of-reach screen with the developed pattern HZ to the out-of-reach screen (normal screen) with the main decorative pattern SZ, Thereafter, at the timing when the normal screen is displayed, it is suggested whether or not the specific pending change is to be executed in the pending display TH. As a result, after an out-of-reach combination is displayed due to the development symbol HZ as a result of the reach development effect, before the variation due to the main decorative symbol SZ is restored, the combination due to the main decorative symbol SZ, which does not indicate the confirmation of the symbol variation display, is displayed. Whether to return to the out-of-reach screen and perform a specific pending change, or return to the out-of-reach screen with the main decorative symbol SZ that indicates confirmation of the symbol variation display and confirm the symbol variation display, from the reach development effect to the normal screen. It can be recognized during the transition. In other words, it is possible to diversify the production mode (game nature) leading to the specific pending change.

The process of setting the CPU 551 display balloon display pattern designation command of the sub-control device 262 in S2305 described above is an example of the advance suggestion effect determining means of the present invention. The auxiliary effect determination process performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 in step S3005 described above is an example of the advance suggestion effect execution means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, a specific speech bubble image that indicates in advance whether or not a specific suspension change of the suspension display TH will be performed is selected from the balloon image display pattern selection table. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs the advance suggestion effect execution function (display balloon display pattern designation command setting process (step S2305)) that determines the balloon image display pattern including SHD, and the display balloon display pattern designation command setting process When a balloon image display pattern including the specific balloon image SHD is determined, a prior suggestion performance execution function (display image control process (step S3006)) for displaying the balloon image display pattern on the third symbol display device 42 is performed. and a CPU 521 of the display control device 45, and in the display balloon display pattern designation command setting process, when the fluctuation pattern 4 corresponding to the jackpot super reach E is determined, the main decorative symbol is changed from the out-of-reach screen by the developed symbol HZ. At the timing of transitioning to the out-of-reach screen (normal screen) due to SZ, a preliminary suggestion effect is displayed as a specific balloon image SHD that says "Change?" expressed in kanji and hiragana that suggests that a specific pending change will be executed. Decide what to do. Such a configuration is an example of the gaming machine described in (A20).

According to such a configuration, after the out-of-reach combination due to the developed symbol HZ is displayed as a result of the reach development effect, before the fluctuation due to the developed symbol HZ is restored, the main symbol that does not indicate the confirmation of the symbol variation display is displayed. Depending on the developed symbol HZ, it is possible to decide whether to return to the out-of-reach screen with the decorative pattern SZ and perform a specific pending change, or whether to return to the out-of-reach screen with the main decorative pattern SZ that indicates confirmation of the symbol variation display and confirm the symbol variation display. The player can be made aware of the timing when the out-of-reach screen shifts to the out-of-reach screen (normal screen) with the main decorative pattern SZ. In other words, not only is there a performance pattern in which if a specific suggestion effect is executed on the out-of-reach screen due to the main decorative symbol SZ, it will lead to a fluctuation recovery due to the developed symbol HZ, but also whether or not the specific suggestion effect is executed at the timing of transitioning to the normal screen. By setting up a production pattern in which there is a pre-suggestion production that suggests that the specific suspension change will occur, we can actively ensure that the specific suspension change will occur not only in the production pattern in which the specific suspension change is executed, but also in the production pattern in which the specific suspension change is not executed. Since it is possible to make the user look forward to it, it is possible to diversify the effects related to the specific pending change.

In addition, in the display balloon display pattern designation command setting process, when variation pattern 4 corresponding to jackpot super reach E is determined, a specific pending change is made at the timing of transition from the out-of-reach screen due to the developed symbol HZ to the normal screen. We have decided to perform the first specific preliminary suggestion effect, which is displayed as a specific speech bubble image SHD, which shows a speech bubble with the words "Change?" written in kanji and hiragana that suggest that it is likely to be carried out, and corresponds to the missed super reach D. When variation pattern 3 is determined, at the timing of transition from the out-of-reach screen due to the developed pattern HZ to the normal screen, a message "Hang on?" expressed only in hiragana indicating that it is difficult to execute the specific suggestion effect is displayed. You may decide to perform a second specific advance suggestion effect that is displayed as a specific balloon image SHD shown in a balloon. Such a configuration is an example of the gaming machine described in (A21).

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of the specific speech bubble image SHD that is executed at the timing when the out-of-reach screen due to the developed pattern HZ shifts to the normal screen, it is determined whether or not the specific suggestion effect is likely to be executed (the developed pattern HZ Since it is possible to know whether the fluctuation caused by the development symbol HZ is likely to return and become a jackpot, the game nature of the reach performance can be diversified, where a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation caused by the development pattern HZ is revived and becomes a jackpot is executed. .

In Examples 1 to 5 described above, the special suggestion effect that is executed when a special variation pattern is determined is executed during the symbol variation display in which the special variation pattern is determined. The difference is that the special suggestion effect is executed at a timing after the special variation pattern is determined and before the symbol variation display based on the special variation pattern is executed.

In the first embodiment, in step S1914 of the prefetch variation pattern designation command reception process described with reference to FIG. 29, when the prefetch variation pattern designation command is received, the first to fourth pending displays H1 are Although the hold display pattern related to H4 is only determined, in the sixth embodiment, when a look-ahead fluctuation pattern designation command is received, the hold display pattern is different from the first to fourth hold display H1 to H4 based on the look-ahead fluctuation pattern designation command. Other look-ahead notification patterns are determined.

Next, the prefetched notice pattern selection table used in the display control device 45 will be described with reference to FIG. 48. The prefetched notice pattern selection table is set so that when one variable display pattern is determined, one prefetched notice pattern is determined together with one pending display pattern. That is, the display control device 45 is configured to execute a pre-read preview effect using one pre-read preview pattern when a display variation pattern command indicating one variation pattern is transmitted from the sub-control device 262.

Note that the configuration for determining the prefetched notice pattern is not limited to the one described above, and may be one that determines whether or not to perform the prefetched notice by lottery when one variation pattern is determined. In this case, even if the variation pattern is the same, it may be difficult to make a pre-read notice in the case of a loss, while making it easier to make a pre-read notice in the case of a jackpot. This makes it possible to strongly expect a jackpot when advance notice is given.

If the fluctuation display pattern is determined to be jackpot normal reach A, B, jackpot super reach A, B, front/back off and non-front/back off normal reach A, B, front/back off/front/other off super reach A, B, complete off/off A to F, The look-ahead notice pattern 1, in which the look-ahead notice pattern 1 is set, is a pattern without a look-ahead notice. This corresponds to the hold display patterns 1 to 4, 8, and 9 in which the first to fourth hold displays H1 to H4 are white. As a result, in a variation pattern in which a jackpot is achieved without making the player expect a jackpot, the player can be given the surprise of winning a jackpot by deliberately not giving advance notice. In addition, by not giving a pre-read notice in the outlier variation pattern that is often determined, it is possible to increase the joy when the pre-read notice is given in other variation patterns.

When the variable display pattern is determined to be a jackpot super reach C, or a super reach C that is out of the order or out of the order, a look-ahead notice pattern 2 is set. In the look-ahead notice pattern 2, there is no look-ahead notice during the fourth hold display, and when the fourth hold display H4 changes to the third hold display H3, when the third hold display H3 changes to the second hold display H2, and when the third hold display H3 changes to the second hold display H2. This is a pattern in which a pre-read preview is executed to display a character image that says "You might win" when changing from the second pending display H2 to the first pending display H1. The pre-read notice pattern 2 corresponds to the suspension display patterns 5 and 6 in which the first to fourth suspension displays H1 to H4 are blue. Super reach C is a variation pattern that is as easy to determine as super reach D in the case of a jackpot, but much more difficult to determine than super reach D in the case of a loss. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high expectation that the symbol change display that will occur later will result in a jackpot.

When the variable display pattern is determined to be a jackpot super reach D, a super reach D that is out of front and back and a win other than the front and back, or a super reach E that is a jackpot, a pre-read notice pattern 3 is set. In the look-ahead notice pattern 3, there is no look-ahead notice during the 4th hold display, and when the 4th hold display H4 changes to the 3rd hold display H3, when the 3rd hold display H3 changes to the 3rd hold display H2, and when the 2nd hold display changes, When changing from the hold display H2 to the first hold display H1, a text image saying "It may be a tough battle, but there is a chance of a comeback" (in FIG. 48, it is written as "Maybe a comeback") is displayed. This is a pattern that executes a special look-ahead notice. The pre-read notice pattern 3 corresponds to the suspension display patterns 5 and 6 in which the first to fourth suspension displays H1 to H4 are blue. Super reach D is a variation pattern that is as easy to determine as super reach C in the case of a jackpot, but much easier to determine than super reach C in the case of a loss. Moreover, the jackpot super reach E is a variation pattern that is less likely to be determined than the super reaches C and D when it becomes a jackpot. This may make it more difficult for players to get a jackpot compared to the case where the pre-read notice shows "You might win," but since there may be a fluctuation revival at the end, symbol fluctuations that will occur later will be displayed. This suggests that even if the result is out of reach, you can still hope until the end.

Next, an example of execution of the prefetch notice pattern 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 49.

In the screen shown in (a), the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4 are displayed, and the symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the pending display TH is stopped due to a missed combination. . A pre-read notice pattern 2 is set for the fourth pending display H4. In the screen shown in (b), the first to fourth hold displays H1 to H4 shown in (a) are shifted to the left one by one to become the corresponding hold display TH, and the first to third hold displays H1 to H3. will be shifted to In other words, the pre-read notice pattern 2 is set for the third hold display H3. At this time, a prefetch preview is executed in which a prefetch preview image SY1 including the words "might win" is displayed in a speech bubble extending upward from the third hold display H3. In the screen shown in (c), this pre-read preview image SY1 is hidden at the start of the next symbol variation display. This is also performed when changing from the third hold display H3 to the second hold display H2 and when displaying the first hold display H1 from the second hold display H2. As a result, the player is in a state of expecting a jackpot from the time the prefetch notice is executed for the third pending display H3 until the symbol variation display corresponding to the pending display for which the prefetch notice was executed. You can see the display performance.

Next, an example of execution of look-ahead notice pattern 3 will be described with reference to FIG.

The screen shown in (a) is the same as the above-mentioned prefetch pattern 2, but in the screen shown in (d), the prefetch notice pattern 3 is set for the third hold display H3. At this time, a special pre-read preview image SY2 is displayed in a speech bubble extending upward from the third hold display H3, which includes the words "It may be a tough game, but there may be a comeback." executed. In the screen shown in (e), this pre-read preview image SY2 is hidden at the start of the next symbol variation display. This special pre-read notice is also performed when the third hold display H3 changes to the second hold display H2 and when the second hold display H2 changes to the first hold display H1. As a result, the player can receive " It may be harder to get a jackpot compared to when the message "You might hit" is displayed, but there may be a fluctuation revival at the end, so even if the symbol fluctuation display that occurs later turns out to be out of reach, you can expect it until the end. You can watch the display with the expectation that the fluctuation will return.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the timing at which the special suggestion performance such as the special pre-read notice is executed is after the special variation pattern is determined, and then the symbol variation display based on the special variation pattern is executed. Specifically, this is the timing at which the second to fourth hold displays H2 to H4 are shifted to the left.

According to such a configuration, the player can, for example, select any one of the first to third pending displays H1 to H3 corresponding to when the first to fourth pending displays H2 to H4 are shifted to the left in the special look-ahead preview performance. By displaying a text image that says ``It may be a tough match, but there is a chance of a comeback,'' the player can confirm that the special pre-read notice has been executed for the third pending display H3. Until the symbol change display corresponding to the pending display where the look-ahead notice is executed, it may be less likely to hit the jackpot compared to when "might hit" is displayed in the look-ahead notice, but the fluctuation will be revived at the end. Therefore, even if the symbol fluctuation display that occurs later turns out to be out of reach, you can expect it to the end, and you can watch the display performance with the expectation that the fluctuation will return. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the display performance from the time the fluctuation pattern is determined until the symbol fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern is executed. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (A3) described later.

In Example 1, the special suggestion effect using the pending display TH is that the pending display pattern 7 corresponding to the jackpot super reach E changes the losing combination by the development symbol HZ to the losing combination by the main decorative symbol SZ in the final variation in the reach development performance. At the timing of changing the combination, the blue pending display TH that had been displayed until then was changed to a rainbow color, but in Example 7, the pending display pattern 7 corresponding to the jackpot super reach E is the embodiment. It is different from 1. Along with this, some of the hold display patterns corresponding to other variable display patterns are also different from those in the first embodiment.

As explained in step S1914 in FIG. 29, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 refers to the pending display pattern selection table and selects the pending display pattern corresponding to the prefetching variable pattern designation command received this time (see FIG. 10). Determine. However, in the seventh embodiment, as described below, some of the hold display patterns are different from the hold display pattern shown in FIG. 10, so the description will be made with reference to FIG. 50.

FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a hold display pattern selection table used in the display control device 45 of the seventh embodiment. The differences from the hold display pattern selection table of the first embodiment will be explained below.

The pending display pattern 4B, which is determined when Super Reach A is determined to be out of the front or back or out of the front or back, is a holding change that changes from white to blue during the first re-fluctuation due to the developed symbol HZ, and the 2nd by the developed symbol HZ. During the second re-variation (final variation), the pending display TH is not displayed, but the pending display TH is re-displayed when a losing combination by the main decorative pattern HZ is displayed. By redisplaying the pending display TH, it is possible to quickly move to the next symbol variation display start screen (for example, a screen for shifting the pending display). In addition, the hold display pattern 9A that is determined when it is determined that the front and back are off and the other than the front and back is off super reach B is the same as the explanation for the hold display pattern 4B, except that the hold display TH remains blue and does not change. be. The pending display pattern 6B, which is determined when Super Reach C is determined to be out of the front or back or out of the front or back, hides the pending display TH during the third re-variation (final variation) due to the developed pattern HZ, but the decoration The pending display TH is set to be redisplayed when a winning combination is displayed by the symbol HZ. Thereby, after showing the player the change in the pending display TH, the pending display pattern 6B can draw the player's attention to the display performance during the final variation of the reach development performance. In addition, even if there is no change in the pending display TH as in the pending display pattern 9A, the display effect during the final variation of the reach development effect can be used without discouraging the player due to no change in the pending display TH. can attract players' attention. Furthermore, the hold display patterns 4B, 9A, and 6B can give the player the impression that the pattern that is redisplayed after the hold display TH is hidden is a missed pattern.

When the variation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach A, a pending display pattern 3A is determined. The pending display pattern 3A is set to display white in the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, and in the corresponding pending display TH, white is displayed at the start of fluctuation of the main decorative pattern SZ, and white is displayed at the first change due to the developed pattern HZ. During the re-fluctuation, a pending change from white to rainbow color is performed (in Fig. 50, it is indicated as "white → rainbow" in the column "Decorative symbol fluctuation start". The same applies hereafter), and the second change by the developed symbol HZ is performed. The pending display TH is set to be hidden from the re-variation (final variation) until the winning combination is determined by the main decorative pattern HZ. The pending display pattern 4A that is determined when the 8R guaranteed variable jackpot super reach B is determined is the same as the explanation for the pending display pattern 3A, except that the change in the pending display TH is displayed from white to blue.

When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach C, a pending display pattern 5A is determined. The pending display pattern 5A is set to display blue in the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, and in the corresponding pending display TH, blue is displayed at the start of fluctuation of the main decorative pattern SZ, and the second display due to the developed pattern HZ is displayed. During the re-variation, a pending change that changes from blue to rainbow color will be performed, and the pending display TH will be hidden from the third re-variation (final variation) by the developed symbol HZ until the winning combination is determined by the decorative symbol HZ. is set to . The pending display pattern 6A that is determined when the 8R guaranteed variable jackpot super reach D is determined is the same as the explanation for the pending display pattern 5A, except that the change in the pending display TH is displayed from blue to red. Thereby, after showing the player the change in the pending display TH, the pending display patterns 5A and 6A can draw the player's attention to the display performance during the final variation of the reach development performance.

When the fluctuation pattern is determined to be 8R probability variable jackpot super reach E, a pending display pattern 7A is determined. The pending display pattern 7A is set to display blue in the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4, and in the pending display TH, from the start of variation due to the main decorative symbol SZ to the second re-variation due to the developed symbol HZ. Until then, it will be displayed in blue, and during the third re-variation (final variation) due to the development symbol HZ, the relevant pending display TH will be hidden, and during the final variation of the reach development effect, the super reach out of the development symbol HZ will be displayed. The hold display TH is set to be hidden and re-displayed in a state where the hold display TH is changed from blue to rainbow color when the main decorative pattern SZ starts displaying the out-of-reach state. As a result, even if the pending display pattern 7A is a color that suggests that the possibility of the pending display TH being a jackpot combination is low in the reach development effect by the development symbol HZ, the result of the reach development effect by the development symbol HZ is Even if it is displayed that the player is out of reach, the symbol does not discourage the player, draws the player's attention to the display effect during the final fluctuation of the reach development effect, and displays the combination of out of reach with the main decorative pattern SZ. A ready-to-reach effect can be shown while maintaining the expectation that a pending change (a variable revival suggestion effect) like the pending display pattern 7A will occur until the last moment of the variable display.

In addition, in the hold change patterns 3A to 6A, the color immediately before the hold display TH is hidden and immediately after it is re-displayed is the same, so the hold change performance in which the hold display TH is hidden and then re-displayed is more interesting. It was difficult to further improve this, but by showing the pending display TH that has changed to a color that is more likely to result in a jackpot when it is redisplayed, it increases the interest of the pending change effect. can be improved. In addition, by showing the hold display TH, which is redisplayed in a rainbow-colored state at the timing when it is recognized that the reach development effect has failed, it is possible to further improve the interest of the hold change effect. .

Next, the hold display pattern in Example 7 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 51 is a time chart illustrating the hold display pattern in the case of a jackpot according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 52 is a time chart illustrating the hold display pattern in the case of failure in the seventh embodiment. Further, an example of execution of the hold display pattern corresponding to each variable display pattern in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 as appropriate. FIG. 53 is an example of execution of the jackpot super reach D of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 54 is an example of execution of super reach D of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 55 is an example of execution of the jackpot super reach E of the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the pending display pattern 1 corresponding to the jackpot normal reach A changes from white at the start of the fluctuation of the main decorative pattern SZ, that is, at the timing when the first pending display H1 shifts to the corresponding pending display TH. This pattern indicates to the player that a jackpot is guaranteed by changing to a rainbow color. This is the same as the hold display pattern 1 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), the pending display pattern 8 corresponding to the normal reach A that is out of front and back and out of the front and back is such that the pending display pattern 8 corresponds to the normal reach A that is out of front and back and out of front and back. This is a pattern in which TH remains white and does not change. This is the same as the hold display pattern 8 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 51(b), the pending display pattern 3A corresponding to the jackpot super reach A is displayed in white at the time when the main decorative pattern SZ starts changing, that is, at the timing when the first pending display H1 shifts to the corresponding pending display TH. After the pending display changes from white to rainbow color 5 seconds before the start of the final variation of the reach development effect, the pending display TH shall be displayed in rainbow color for 5 seconds until the final variation starts. This is a pattern that suggests to the player that a jackpot is guaranteed. In the hold display pattern 3A, the hold display TH is hidden from the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 after the start of the final variation of the reach development effect. Thereby, after the change in the pending display TH is shown to the player, the player's attention can be drawn to the display performance during the final change of the reach development performance.

As shown in FIG. 52(b), in the hold display pattern 4B corresponding to the super reach A that is out of front and back and out of the front and back, the hold display TH is the first time in the reach development effect from the start of fluctuation of the main decorative symbol SZ. It is displayed in white until 5 seconds before the end of the re-variation, and changes to blue 5 seconds after the end of the first re-variation, and the developing pattern is displayed from the start of the second re-variation (final variation) in the reach development effect to the final variation. This pattern is such that it is not displayed until the display of the winning combination by HZ is finished, and the pending display in blue is displayed again at the time when the winning combination by the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed. Thereby, after the change in the pending display TH is shown to the player, the player's attention can be drawn to the display performance during the final change of the reach development performance. Furthermore, in the case of a super reach miss, the player can be made aware that the pending display TH will be redisplayed at the time when the miss combination of the main decorative symbols SZ is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 51(c), the pending display pattern 6A corresponding to the jackpot super reach D is such that the pending display TH is from the start of the fluctuation of the main decorative symbol SZ to the end 5 of the second re-fluctuation of the reach development effect. The color was blue until a few seconds ago (see also Figures 53(a) to (d)), but after changing from blue to red 5 seconds before the end of the second re-fluctuation, it lasted for 5 seconds until the final fluctuation started. , displays the pending display TH in red (see also FIG. 53(e)), and hides the pending display TH and the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4 after the start of the final fluctuation (see FIG. 53(e)). (See also f) to (h)). It's a pattern. As a result, after the player is shown the change in the pending display TH from blue to red, if the pending display TH continues to be displayed, the player expects a further change in the pending display TH. It is easy to draw attention to the pending display TH, but in the pending display pattern 6A, by hiding the pending display TH after the final fluctuation starts, the player's attention is focused on the display performance during the final fluctuation of the reach development performance. can be collected.

As shown in FIG. 52(c), in the pending display pattern 10A corresponding to the super reach D that is out of front and back and out of the front and back, the pending display TH is the second time in the reach development effect from the start of fluctuation of the main decorative symbol SZ. It is displayed in blue until the end of the re-variation (see also Figures 54(a) to (e)), and is hidden from the start of the final variation in the reach development effect until the end of the display of the losing combination by the development symbol HZ in the final variation. (See also FIGS. 54(f) to (g)), and at the time when the missing combination by the main decorative pattern SZ is displayed, the blue pending display TH and the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4 are displayed again. (See also FIG. 54(h)) pattern. As a result, if the pending display TH remains blue and does not change to the player, and if the pending display TH continues to be displayed, the player will be discouraged by the low possibility that the pending display TH will become a jackpot. However, in the hold display pattern 10A, by hiding the hold display TH after the start of the final variation, the player's attention can be drawn to the display effect during the final change of the reach development effect.

As shown in FIG. 51(d), in the pending display pattern 7A corresponding to the jackpot super reach E, the pending display TH is from the time of variation of the main decorative pattern SZ until the end of the second re-variation of the reach development effect. It is displayed in blue (see also FIGS. 55(a) to (e)), and is hidden from the start of the final variation in the reach development effect until the end of the display of the losing combination by the development symbol HZ in the final variation ( (See also FIGS. 55(f) to (g)). Thereby, the player's attention can be drawn to the display performance during the final variation of the reach development performance. At the time when the display of a winning combination by the developed pattern HZ is changed to the display of a winning combination by the main decorative pattern SZ, the pending display TH in a rainbow-colored state is redisplayed, and thereafter the pending display TH is displayed. (See also FIGS. 55(h) to (j)). As a result, the player can watch the game at a timing that seems to be a winning pattern, after the winning combination by the developed symbol HZ is displayed in the final variation, the winning combination by the developed symbol HZ changes to the winning combination by the main decorative symbol SZ. In addition to redisplaying the hold display TH, it is suddenly displayed in a rainbow-colored state at the time of redisplay, making it possible to realize a hold change effect that greatly amazes the player. .

As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines when a variable revival suggestion performance like the suspension display pattern 7A is determined in the suspension display pattern determination process described above. , the hold display TH that suggests that the probability of the winning combination being aligned is at a predetermined height during the symbol fluctuation display is used as a reach development effect during the symbol fluctuation display based on the jackpot super reach E. It is hidden from the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 at the timing corresponding to the start of the final variation, and after the losing combination by the main decorative symbol SZ is stopped in front of the normal screen at the end of the final variation of the reach development effect. , when the pending display TH is made easily visible to the player again before the special fluctuation is executed, the probability of winning the jackpot combination suggested by the pending display TH is higher than a predetermined height. By displaying it again in a rainbow-colored state that suggests that the price has increased, a fluctuation revival suggestion effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, if the fluctuation revival suggestion performance is determined by the suspension display pattern determination process, the possibility that the symbol fluctuation displays will be aligned in a winning combination is a predetermined high (for example, if the jackpot expectation level is When the pending display TH, which is displayed in blue during the symbol fluctuation display, indicates that the symbol is low (low), changes to rainbow color, indicating that the pending display TH is higher than this predetermined height (for example, the jackpot is confirmed). , if the pending display TH changes from blue to rainbow color while it continues to be displayed, the player will continue to maintain expectations for the symbol variation display while continuing to look at the blue pending display TH. There is a possibility that you may not be able to do so. In the present invention, the pending display TH that indicates that the probability of the winning combination of the symbol fluctuations being displayed is a predetermined height is provided to the player at a predetermined timing during the symbol fluctuation display. The player does not have to keep looking at the pending display TH, where the probability of winning a jackpot remains at a predetermined level, until the end of the symbol fluctuation display. . The suspended display TH, which has been made difficult to see, is redisplayed so that it is easy to see again after the out-of-place combination is stopped in front of the normal background and before the fluctuation recovery is executed. At a suitable time to suggest to the player a special fluctuation pattern that makes the player think that the fluctuation display has been confirmed by a winning combination, or that it is a waiting period until the next symbol fluctuation display starts. , the pending display TH can be shown to the player again. When the pending display TH is redisplayed so as to be easily visible to the player, the possibility of winning the jackpot combination suggested by the pending display TH is less visible than before. Since it has changed to a high rainbow color, the moment the player sees the hold display TH again, he or she can get an indication that it may be a special fluctuation pattern. As a result, while the symbol fluctuations are being displayed, the player can continue to watch the display performance including the symbol fluctuation displays while maintaining the expectation that the symbol fluctuation displays will be in a winning combination, and the winning combination will be displayed. After that, the user can continue to view the display performance including the symbol variation display while maintaining the expectation that the variation pattern is a special variation pattern until the final moment of the symbol variation display. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the symbol variation display accompanied by the suggestive information display performance in which the display mode of the suggestive information that suggests the result of the determination regarding the game changes. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (D1) described later.

In addition, when redisplaying the pending display TH so that it is easy to see for the player again, the symbol variation display is a reach that is complete except for one remaining symbol among the plurality of main decorative symbols SZ. In the reach state (reach development performance) by the development symbol HZ after passing through the state (normal reach), the reach development background in which the remaining development symbol HZ stops so as to become an out-of-reach combination is displayed during the reach development performance. This is after the out-of-reach combination is displayed in front of HH3 and is stopped in front of the normal background NH until the fluctuation recovery is executed.

According to such a configuration, the pending display TH, which is hidden so as to be difficult to visually recognize, is displayed after the symbol variation display is a reach development effect and the out-of-reach combination is displayed in front of the reach development background HH3. Then, after the out-of-reach combination is stopped in front of the normal background NH and before the fluctuation recovery is executed, it is redisplayed so that it is easy to see again, so the symbol fluctuation display shows the out-of-reach combination. The pending display TH is displayed at a suitable timing to suggest to the player a special fluctuation pattern that makes the player think that the pattern has been confirmed or that it is a waiting period until the next symbol fluctuation display starts. can be shown to the player again. As a result, during the reach development performance, the player can continue to watch the display performance including the symbol fluctuation display while maintaining the expectation that the symbol fluctuation display will be a winning combination, and the out-of-reach combination will not be displayed. Even after the symbol fluctuation display is completed, the user can continue to view the display performance including the symbol fluctuation display while maintaining the expectation that the fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern until the final moment of the symbol fluctuation display. As a result, it is possible to increase the impact on players who are disappointed with the result of being out of reach. Such a configuration is an example of a gaming machine described in (D2) below.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may have other configurations that produce similar effects, and can be modified, for example, as described below.

<1> In addition to the specific holding changes explained in the above-mentioned embodiments, as long as it is an effect that indicates the confirmation of a jackpot, it may be a sound, another image, or an ornament. Good too.

<2> The specific hold change explained in Example 1 above may be a color or pattern other than rainbow colors, or a change in which another object (image, accessory) acts on the hold display TH. But that's fine.

<3> In the above-described first embodiment, the high probability time may be limited to a predetermined number of gaming times. In that case, if the predetermined number of times is exceeded, the process returns to the low probability state. A specific suggestion performance such as a specific pending change may be performed only when the probability is high for a limited number of times. When the specific suggestion performance is performed just before the end of the limited number of times, it is possible to particularly improve the interest in the symbol variation display.

<4> In the above-described first embodiment, the specific suggestion effect was performed regardless of the type of jackpot, but the specific pending change may be performed only in the reach effect that results in a probability variable jackpot. Although the specific pending change indicates whether or not a jackpot combination will result, it may also indicate whether it is a definite variable jackpot or a normal jackpot.

<5> In the above-mentioned Example 1, the fluctuation revival and specific suggestion effect of the development symbol HZ were performed only in the jackpot super reach E, but as with the jackpot super reach E, the relevant display is suspended until the end of the final variation of the reach development effect. TH may be executed in jackpot super reach B where expectations for a jackpot were low.

<6> In the above-described first embodiment, the fluctuation revival performance of the developed symbol HZ and the specific pending change were included, but only the fluctuation resurrection performance of the developed symbol HZ may be performed without including the specific pending change. Instead of the specific pending change, either or both of the background change and the audio output change may be performed.

<7> In the above-mentioned Example 2, all of the normal background NH was changed to the specific normal background SNH. It's okay.

<8> In the above-described first embodiment, when the hold display TH is changed to a rainbow color in order to suggest a recovery of fluctuation, the display changes to a rainbow color all at once. However, with the configuration in which the pending display TH is changed all at once to the final stage, there is another problem in that it is difficult for the player to maintain a sense of anticipation until the pending display TH changes to the final stage. Therefore, when changing the pending display TH to indicate the recovery of fluctuations, it is necessary to include a configuration in which the pending display TH is changed in stages so that it can be seen that the pending display TH is changing toward the final stage. Good too. For example, when a jackpot super reach E is determined, the pending display TH is displayed in one color, blue among the colors of the rainbow, at the start of the fluctuation of the main decorative pattern SZ. It is displayed in two stripes of blue and green at the start of the reach development performance using the development pattern HZ. At the point when these two striped patterns are displayed, the player can recognize that there is a possibility that the color is changing toward the final stage, which is the rainbow color. At the start of the second re-variation due to the developed pattern HZ, it is displayed as three stripes of blue, green, and yellow. At the start of the third re-variation (final variation), four stripes of blue, green, green, and red are displayed. These four striped patterns may also be displayed even when the jackpot is determined to be super reach D, front/back off, or off/back off C, D. When the out-of-reach combination due to the developed pattern HZ changes to the out-of-reach combination due to the main decorative pattern SZ, a five-striped pattern of blue, green, yellow, red, and purple is displayed to suggest a recovery of fluctuation. In this case, while the pending display is displayed with four stripes in the final variation, it is difficult to distinguish between the jackpot super reach E, the front and rear misses, and the misses other than the front and rear super reach C and D, so the contents of the display effect Even if the result is likely to be out of reach, the player can continue to watch the display performance with the expectation that the final purple color will be added.

In addition, when the jackpot super reach E is determined as in Example 2, the specific background change that changes the normal background NH to the specific background image SNH at the time of displaying the error before the fluctuation recovery is such that the normal background NH is rainbow-colored at once. However, the background image of the reach development effect is gradually changed in such a manner that it can be seen that it is changing towards the final stage (for example, rainbow color). It may be. In this case, for example, in the case of a missed super reach D, the change may be made to end before the color becomes rainbow colored as described above.

In addition, when a jackpot super reach E is determined as in Example 3, a specific pattern change that changes the main decorative pattern SZ at the time of a loss display before the fluctuation recovery to a specific main decorative pattern SSZ is such that the main decorative pattern SZ is changed once. The configuration was such that the specific main decorative pattern SSZ was changed to a rainbow-colored specific main decorative pattern SSZ, but it can be seen that it changes toward the final stage (for example, a rainbow color) when the temporary stop of the discontinuous combination every pseudo-set 1 to 3. The specific main decorative pattern SSZ may be changed in stages in this manner. In this case as well, for example, in the case of a missed super reach D, the change may be made to end before the color becomes rainbow colored as described above.

<9> In the seventh embodiment described above, the pending display TH is hidden from the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 to make it difficult for the player to see. It may also be in a state where it is difficult for the player to see it while it remains displayed on the display screen 42a. For example, at the timing to hide the hold display TH, the player can move a predetermined accessory from a position outside the frame of the display screen 42a to a position within the frame of the display screen 42a that hides the hold display TH. It may also be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize. Further, for example, the pending display TH and the first to fourth pending displays H1 to H4 may be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 42 (for example, a liquid crystal display device smaller than the third symbol display device 42). Then, by moving the other display device from a position where it is easily visible to the player to a position where it is difficult to see, the hold display may be made difficult for the player to see. In addition, at the same time that the hold display TH was made difficult for the player to see, the hold displays H1 to H4 were also made difficult for the player to see, but the four corresponding hold displays H1 to H4 A hold lamp may be placed below the third symbol display device 42 to supplement the hold display during a period in which the hold displays H1 to H4 are difficult for the player to see. Further, a holding lamp corresponding to the holding display TH may be arranged below the third symbol display device 42.

<10> In the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine is explained, but the present invention may be applied to other types of gaming machines such as slot machines.

For example, the present invention may be implemented in various types of gaming machines (for example, type 1, type 3, etc.), or it may be implemented in pachinko machines of different types from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). ) may be implemented. Furthermore, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a specific gaming state with the necessary condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after a jackpot symbol is displayed. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a specific gaming state when a ball enters a predetermined winning hole. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as arranged ball type pachinko, mahjong ball, and so-called game machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, in a slot machine, for example, the symbols are changed by inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line by operating the control lever, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. be. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means (reel and reel driving means) that variably displays a symbol row (three rows of reels) consisting of a plurality of symbols, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner. The fluctuation of the symbols is started due to the operation of a means (for example, a control lever), and the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. , a special gaming state generating means that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol, and in this case, the gaming medium is Typical examples include coins and medals. child

A specific example of a gaming machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a slot machine is equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner. Here are some things we don't have. In this case, after a predetermined amount of game balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbols start to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the variation of the symbols starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a jackpot condition advantageous to the player is generated with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given A large number of balls are paid out.

Note that this specification also discloses an invention related to the following gaming machine.

<First task>
Conventionally, typical examples of gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines.

This type of gaming machine, for example, acquires judgment information used for a predetermined judgment regarding a game when a predetermined condition is satisfied, makes a judgment regarding the game using the judgment information, and displays a display effect based on the result of the judgment. There is something to be displayed on the display device. In addition, some gaming machines of this type execute various suggestive effects that suggest the result of the determination to the player while the display effects are being displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-33922 (See page 199 and Figure 209).

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in conventional gaming machines, there is a problem in that if the suggested effect does not give the player a chance of winning, it is difficult for the player to view the displayed effect while maintaining expectations for the result of the displayed effect.

The following invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that can improve the interest in a display performance accompanied by a suggestive performance that suggests to the player the result of a determination regarding a game. The purpose is to

(A1) Judgment information acquisition means for obtaining judgment information used in a predetermined judgment regarding a game when a predetermined condition is met;
determination means for making a determination regarding the game using the determination information;
a display means capable of displaying a display effect including a symbol fluctuation display from when a plurality of symbols start to fluctuate until they stop at a combination indicating a determination result by the determination means;
If the determination result indicates that the symbol variation display is stopped at a winning combination, a winning variation pattern is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns indicating the variation mode of the symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display is determined to be a winning variation pattern. If the determination result indicates that the pattern will be stopped at a winning combination, a winning variation pattern is determined, and after the symbol variation display is temporarily stopped at a winning combination, the symbol variation display is stopped at a winning combination. variation pattern determining means for determining a special variation pattern when the determination result indicates that a special variation is to be executed;
Suggestion performance determining means for determining a predetermined suggestion performance from among a plurality of suggestion performances that suggest that the symbol variation display may match the winning combination;
Suggestion effect execution means for executing the predetermined suggestion effect determined by the suggestion effect determination means,
When the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means is the special variation pattern, the suggested effect determination means determines that there is a possibility that the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means is the special variation pattern. deciding to execute a special suggestion effect that suggests something to the player before the special variation is executed;
A game characterized in that the suggestion performance execution means executes the special suggestion performance determined by the suggestion performance determination means during a period from when the special variation pattern is determined until when the special variation is executed. Machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (A1) above, when the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means is a special fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means may be a special fluctuation pattern. It is determined by the suggestion performance determining means to execute a special suggestion performance that suggests to the player that there is a certain possibility before the special variation is executed. The special suggestion performance determined by the suggestion performance determining means is executed by the suggestion performance execution means during a period after the variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern is determined until the special variation is executed. As a result, if the player notices the special suggestion performance and understands the content of the suggestion, he or she can realize that the determined variation pattern may be a special variation pattern before the special variation is executed. can. Therefore, by noticing the special suggestion effect, the player maintains a sense of expectation that the special variation pattern has been determined from the time the special suggestion effect is executed until the special variation is executed. You can continue to watch the display. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the display performance accompanied by the suggestive performance that suggests to the player the result of the determination regarding the game.

(A2) In the gaming machine described in (A1),
A gaming machine characterized in that the special fluctuation is a revival jackpot fluctuation in which the symbol fluctuation display is temporarily stopped at a winning combination and then stopped at a winning combination.

According to the invention described in (A2), by noticing the special suggestion performance, the player can realize the variation pattern in which the revival jackpot variation is performed from the execution of the special suggestion production until the execution of the special variation. It is possible to continue viewing the display performance while maintaining a sense of expectation for what has been decided.

(A3) In the gaming machine described in (A1) or (A2) above,
Before the special variation is executed, the timing is before the symbol variation display based on the special variation pattern is executed,
The period after the special fluctuation pattern is determined until the special fluctuation is executed is the timing between after the special fluctuation pattern is determined and until the symbol fluctuation display based on the special fluctuation pattern is executed. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine described in (A3) above, by noticing the special suggestion performance, the player can play the special suggestion performance from the time the special suggestion performance is executed until the symbol variation display based on the special variation pattern is executed. It is possible to continue viewing the display performance while maintaining a sense of expectation that the fluctuation pattern has been determined. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the display performance from the time the fluctuation pattern is determined until the symbol fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern is executed.

(A4) In the gaming machine described in (A1) or (A2) above,
Before the special variation is executed is the timing from when the symbol variation display based on the special variation pattern is executed until the special variation is executed during the symbol variation display,
The period from when the special variation pattern is determined until the special performance is executed is the timing from when the symbol variation display based on the special variation pattern is executed until the special variation is executed. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine described in (A4) above, by noticing the special suggestion effect, the player can control the game from when the special suggestion effect is executed until when the special variation is executed during the symbol variation display based on the special variation pattern. During this time, the user can continue to view the display performance while maintaining a sense of expectation that the special variation pattern has been determined. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the display performance while the symbol variation display is being executed.

(A5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4) above,
comprising a storage means having a plurality of reserved storage areas capable of storing the judgment information acquired by the judgment information acquisition means,
The display means is configured to display a pending image indicating that, when the determining information is stored in the pending storage area, there is a possibility that the symbol variation display based on the stored determining information may be aligned with the winning combination. can be displayed,
When the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means is the special fluctuation pattern, the suggestive effect determining means is configured to perform the suggestive effect using the reserved image corresponding to the determination information for which the special fluctuation pattern has been determined. Decided to carry out a special suggestive performance,
The game machine is characterized in that the suggestive performance execution means executes the special suggestive performance using the suspended image after the suspended image is displayed until the special variation is executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A5) above, when the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means is a special variation pattern, the reserved image corresponding to the determination information for which the special variation pattern was determined is A special suggestion effect using the pending image is executed between the time it is displayed and the special variation is executed. Thereby, by recognizing the special suggestion effect using the pending image, the player understands that this pending image may correspond to the special fluctuation pattern. As a result, after the player recognizes the special suggestion performance using this pending image, the player can continue to use the special fluctuation pattern until the special performance is executed during symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information corresponding to this pending image. It is possible to continue viewing the display performance while maintaining a sense of expectation that the decision has been made. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the display performance.

(A6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A3) and (5) above,
The suspension storage area has a pre-execution suspension storage area in which the determination information before the symbol variation display is executed,
When the judgment information is stored in the pre-execution hold storage area, the display means displays a pre-execution hold that indicates that there is a possibility that symbol variation displays based on the stored judgment information will be aligned in a winning combination. It is possible to display an image,
When the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means is the special fluctuation pattern, the suggestive effect determining means selects the pre-execution pending image corresponding to the determination information for which the special fluctuation pattern has been determined. decided to execute the special suggestive performance using
The game machine is characterized in that the suggestion performance execution means executes the special suggestion performance using the pre-execution pending image from when the pre-execution pending image is displayed until the special variation is executed. .

According to the gaming machine described in (A6) above, when the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means is a special variation pattern, the pre-execution pending image corresponding to the determination information for which the special variation pattern has been determined. A special suggestion effect using the pre-execution pending image is executed after the is displayed until the special variation is executed. Thereby, by recognizing the special suggestion performance using the pre-execution pending image, the player understands that the pre-execution pending image may correspond to the special variation pattern. As a result, after the player recognizes the special suggestion effect using this pre-execution pending image, while this pre-execution pending image is displayed, a special fluctuation pattern is determined for the pre-execution pending image. You can continue to watch the display while maintaining your sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the display performance.

(A7) In the gaming machine described in (A1), (A2), (A4) to (A6),
The reservation storage area has a reservation storage area in which the determination information corresponding to the symbol variation display being executed by the display means is stored,
When the judgment information is stored in the holding storage area, the display means displays the holding image indicating that the symbol variation display based on the stored judgment information may be aligned in a winning combination. Displayable,
When the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means is the special fluctuation pattern, the suggestive effect determining means uses the reserved image corresponding to the determination information for which the special fluctuation pattern has been determined. decided to carry out the special suggestive performance,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the suggestive performance execution means executes the special suggestive performance using the suspended image while the suspended image is displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A7) above, when the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means is a special variation pattern, the special variation pattern is determined while the pending image is displayed. A special suggestion effect using the pending image corresponding to the determined determination information is executed. Thereby, the player understands that this pending image may correspond to a special variation pattern by visually recognizing the special suggestion effect for the pending image. As a result, after the player visually recognizes the special suggestion effect using this pending image, a special variation pattern is determined for the pending image while the symbol variation display based on this pending image is being executed. You can continue watching the display while maintaining your sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the display performance.

(A8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1), (A2), (A4), (A5), and (A7),
The winning fluctuation pattern is
At least a normal variation in which the plurality of symbols starts to fluctuate in front of a normal background that is displayed while the plurality of symbols are not fluctuating, and a Includes a reach variation in which the one remaining symbol changes in front of the reach background that is displayed while a reach is established in a winning combination, and a win stop in which the plurality of symbols are aligned in the winning combination after the reach variation. ,
The loss variation pattern includes the normal variation, the reach variation, an out-of-reach stop in which the remaining symbol stops in front of the reach background after the reach variation, and the out-of-reach stop. an out-of-line stop in which the out-of-line combination stops in front of the normal background;
The special variation pattern includes the normal variation, the reach variation, the out-of-reach stop, and a revival winning variation in which the plurality of symbols are aligned in the winning combination after the out-of-reach stop,
When the special variation pattern is determined, the suggestive effect execution means displays the out-of-reach stop in front of the reach background and before the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the normal background. , A gaming machine characterized in that the specific suggestion performance is executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A8) above, the symbol variation display executed in the loss variation pattern includes a normal variation, a reach variation, an out-of-reach stop, and an out-of-reach stop. The symbol variation display executed with the special variation pattern includes normal variation, reach variation, out-of-reach stop, and revival hit variation, but the out-of-reach stop executed with the special variation pattern is based on the reach background. Since it is displayed in the foreground and then ends in front of the normal background, it is perceived by the player as a symbol variation display (stopping out of the reach and stopping out) executed in an out-of-reach pattern. After the display of out-of-reach stop is completed in front of the normal background, the revival winning variation is executed, so the player recognizes that the symbol variation display was accompanied by a revival effect. The specific suggestion effect is executed after the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the reach background and before the out-of-reach stop display ends in front of the normal background, so the symbol fluctuation display ends in an out-of-reach pattern. , it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of a winning combination, during a period when the player is not aware that there will be a revival performance after this.

Therefore, for a player who has seen or is aware of the special variation pattern, an out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the out-of-reach background as a result of not only the special variation pattern but also the out-of-reach variation pattern and then the normal background. Even if it is displayed in front, a specific suggestion effect will occur after the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the reach background until the final moment of the symbol variation display when the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the normal background. It is possible to show a display effect including a symbol variation display having a revival winning variation while maintaining expectations for the game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the display performance including the symbol variation display having the variation per revival.

(A9) In the gaming machine described in (A8) above,
When the special variation pattern is executed, the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the reach background and then the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the normal background. A gaming machine characterized in that the mode is the same as that in which the out-of-reach stop is displayed and then the out-of-reach stop is displayed when the out-of-reach stop is displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A9) above, although the symbol variation display of the special variation pattern is actually executed, the manner in which a plurality of symbols are varied and stopped in the losing variation pattern is the same, The specific suggestion performance can be executed at a timing that the player recognizes as the end of the symbol variation display of the losing pattern. As a result, the player is shown a display effect including a symbol variation display having a variation per revival, while maintaining the expectation that a specific suggestive production will occur until the final moment of the symbol variation display. I can do it.

(A10) In the gaming machine described in (A9) above,
When the special variation pattern is executed, the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the out-of-reach background and the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the normal background. The normal background is characterized by being the same as the out-of-reach background and the normal background that are displayed from when the out-of-reach stop is displayed until the out-of-reach stop is displayed when the loss variation pattern is executed. A gaming machine that does.

According to the gaming machine described in (A10) above, although the symbol variation display of the special variation pattern is actually executed, since the same background image as the background image in the out-of-order variation pattern is displayed, the player If it is estimated from the background image, it is possible to execute a specific suggestion performance at a timing that is recognized as the end of the symbol variation display of the out-of-order pattern. As a result, even if the background image is such that the player guesses the wrong pattern, the player maintains a sense of expectation that a specific suggestive effect will occur until the final moment of the symbol change display. It is possible to show a display effect including a symbol variation display having a revival hit variation.

(A11) In the gaming machine described in (A1) to (A10) above,
The suggestion performance determining means determines a predetermined suggestion performance pattern to be executed during the symbol variation display from among a plurality of suggestion production patterns in which suggestion production is performed multiple times during the symbol variation display. hand,
The suggestive effect determining means causes the display means to execute a predetermined suggestive effect pattern determined by the suggestive effect determining means,
The suggestion performance that is performed multiple times in the specific suggestion performance is such that the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the reach background, rather than the suggestion performance that is performed before the out-of-reach stop is displayed in front of the reach background. A game characterized in that a suggestion performance performed before the end of the out-of-reach stop display in front of the normal background suggests that there is a higher possibility that the plurality of symbols will align in the winning combination. Machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (A11) above, although the symbol variation display of the special variation pattern is actually being executed, it appears that the symbol variation display of the missing pattern is being executed, The suggestion performance pattern that is executed during symbol fluctuation display is limited to a suggestion performance that is unlikely to result in a winning combination of multiple symbols, so it is difficult for the player to guess from the suggestion performance that it is a wrong pattern. A specific suggestion effect can be executed at the timing recognized as the end of the symbol variation display. As a result, even if the content of the suggestive effect pattern is such that the player guesses a wrong pattern, the player maintains a sense of expectation that the specific suggestive effect will occur until the final moment of the symbol change display. , it is possible to show a display effect including a symbol variation display having a revival hit variation.

(A12) In the gaming machine according to (A1) or (A11),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific suggestion performance is a win specific suggestion performance that suggests that it is certain that the plurality of symbols are aligned in the winning combination.

According to the gaming machine described in (A12) above, the symbol fluctuation display ends with a winning pattern, and during a period when the player is not aware that a revival jackpot effect will follow, multiple symbols are won. By suggesting that it is certain that the combination will come together, the player can maintain a sense of expectation that a specific suggestion effect will occur until the final moment of the symbol change display, and can create a revival hit. A display effect including a symbol variation display having variation can be shown.

(A13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A8) to (A12) above,
The game machine is characterized in that the suggestion performance execution means executes the specific suggestion performance while displaying the missed stop in front of the normal background in the symbol variation display executed in the special variation pattern.

According to the gaming machine described in (A13) above, when a symbol variation display executed in a special variation pattern is displaying a stop in front of the normal background, the player can is recognized. By executing the specific suggestion effect at this timing, we hope that even if the symbol variation display appears to be off and fixed, the specific suggestion effect will occur until the final moment of the symbol variation display. It is possible to show a display performance including a symbol variation display having a revival hit variation while maintaining the feeling.

(A14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A8) to (A13) above,
In the symbol variation display executed in accordance with the special variation pattern, the suggested effect execution means performs the specified operation at approximately the same time as the background image displayed behind the out-of-reach stop returns from the reach-to-reach background to the normal background. A gaming machine characterized by executing a suggestive performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (A14) above, when the background image displayed behind the out-of-reach stop in the symbol variation display executed in the special variation pattern returns from the reach-to-reach background to the normal background, the symbol The player recognizes that the fluctuating display is determined to be an off pattern. By executing the specific suggestion effect at this timing, a display effect including a symbol variation display with a revival hit variation can be performed while maintaining the expectation that the specific suggestion production will occur until the final moment of the symbol variation display. can be shown.

(A15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A8) to (A13) above,
In the symbol variation display executed in the special variation pattern, the suggestive effect execution means is configured to display a pattern after the timing at which the background image displayed behind the out-of-reach stop returns from the out-of-reach background to the normal background. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific suggestion effect is executed while the normal background is displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A15) above, in the symbol variation display executed in the special variation pattern, the background image displayed behind the out-of-reach stop returns from the in-reach background to the normal background. While the normal background is displayed, the symbol variation display is determined to be an out-of-order pattern, and the player recognizes it as a standby screen until the next symbol variation display starts. By executing the specific suggestion effect at this timing, a display effect including a symbol variation display with a revival hit variation can be performed while maintaining the expectation that the specific suggestion production will occur until the final moment of the symbol variation display. can be shown.

(A16) In the gaming machine described in (A6) above,
The special suggestion effect changes the pending image to a special pending image that indicates a higher possibility of matching the winning combination indicated by the pending image displayed during the symbol variation display. A gaming machine characterized by a special hold change.

According to the gaming machine described in (A16) above, even if a winning combination is displayed while indicating that there is a low probability that the pending images will form a winning combination, the probability is higher than that possibility. The symbol fluctuation display can be shown in a state in which a special reservation change that changes to a special reservation image showing the symbol change is expected until the end of the symbol fluctuation display.

(A17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4) or (A8) to (15) above,
The suggestive performance determining means selects from among a plurality of background composition images that are images that suggest that there is a possibility that the plurality of symbols may be aligned in the jackpot combination and constitute the rear side of the plurality of symbols. , a background composition image determining means for determining a predetermined background composition image to be displayed during the symbol variation display;
The suggestive effect execution means is a background composition image display execution means that causes the display means to display the predetermined background composition image determined by the background composition image determination means,
At least when the special variation pattern is determined, the background image determining means selects one of the plurality of background constituent images from among the plurality of background constituent images between the time the special variation pattern is determined and the time when the special variation is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined to display a specific background composition image that is a background composition image that suggests that there is a high possibility that the symbols will be aligned in the winning combination.

According to the gaming machine described in (A17) above, even if the symbol variation display is displayed in a winning combination, the background suggests that there is a high possibility that a plurality of symbols among the plurality of background constituent images will be arranged in a winning combination. The symbol variation display can be shown in a state where the expectation is that a specific background constituent image, which is a constituent image, will be displayed until the end of the symbol variation display.

(A18) In the gaming machine described in (A17) above,
The background composition image determining means is a background pattern determining means for determining a predetermined background pattern to be executed during the symbol variation display as a predetermined suggestion effect from among a plurality of background patterns displayed as a background of the symbol variation display. can be,
The background composition image display execution means is a background pattern execution means that causes the display means to sequentially display a plurality of background images according to the predetermined background pattern determined by the background pattern determination means,
At least when the special variation pattern is determined, the background pattern determining means is configured to determine the background pattern immediately before the special variation is executed, after the special variation pattern is determined and before the special variation is executed. Determining a specific background pattern that changes a background image that suggests that there is a low possibility that the plurality of symbols will align in the winning combination to a background image that suggests that there is a high possibility that the plurality of symbols will align in the winning combination. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine described in (A18) above, even if the symbol variation display is displayed in a winning combination, it suggests that the possibility that a plurality of symbols will be in a winning combination immediately before the special variation is executed is low. It is possible to show a symbol variation display in a state where the background image changes to a background image that suggests that there is a high possibility that multiple symbols will come together in a winning combination, with the user expecting a background change in a specific background pattern until the end of the symbol variation display. can.

(A19) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4) or (A8) to (15) above,
The special suggestion performance is characterized by a special symbol change that changes at least one symbol among the plurality of symbols constituting the losing combination to a special symbol that suggests that there is a high possibility that the jackpot combination will be arranged. A gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (A19) above, the symbol changes to a special symbol that indicates that there is a high possibility that at least one of the plurality of symbols constituting a losing combination will form a winning combination. The symbol fluctuation display can be shown in the expected state until the end of the fluctuation display.

(A20) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4) or (A8) to (15) above,
advance suggestion performance determining means for determining a predetermined advance suggestion performance from among a plurality of advance suggestion performances that suggest execution of the special suggestion performance;
advance suggestion performance execution means for executing the predetermined advance suggestion performance determined by the advance suggestion performance determination means;
The advance suggestion performance determining means determines a specific advance suggestion performance to be executed before the special suggestion performance is executed when the special variation pattern is determined;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advance suggestion performance execution means executes the specific advance suggestion performance determined by the advance suggestion performance determination means before the special suggestion performance is executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A20) above, when the special fluctuation pattern is determined, the advance suggestion performance is executed before the special suggestion performance is executed, so whether or not the specific suggestion performance is executed is determined. In addition to the game nature of not knowing the specific fluctuation pattern, when the special fluctuation pattern is determined, there is also the game nature of knowing that if the specific advance suggestion performance is executed, the specific suggestion performance will be executed, so the special fluctuation pattern will be executed. Display effects can be diversified.

(A21) In the gaming machine described in (A20) above,
The advance suggestion performance determining means determines a first specific advance suggestion performance that suggests that the special suggestion performance is likely to be executed when the special variation pattern is determined, and the outlier variation pattern is determined. The gaming machine is characterized in that the second specific suggestion performance is determined to suggest that the special suggestion performance is difficult to be executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (21) above, when the special variation pattern is determined, the first specific advance suggestion performance that suggests that the special suggestion performance is likely to be executed is executed, and the out-of-order variation pattern is determined. In this case, a second specific advance suggestion effect indicating that the special suggestion effect is unlikely to be executed is executed. This adds a game feature in which it is known whether or not the special suggestion performance is likely to be executed depending on the type of the specific advance suggestion performance, so it is possible to diversify the game performance of the display performance including the special variation pattern.

<Second task>
Conventionally, typical examples of gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines.

This type of gaming machine acquires judgment information used for a predetermined judgment regarding the game when a predetermined condition is met, makes a judgment regarding the game using the judgment information, and displays a symbol variation display based on the result of the judgment. There is something to display on the device. In addition, some gaming machines of this type execute various suggestive effects that suggest the result of the determination to the player while displaying symbol variations (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-33922 (See page 199 and Figure 209).

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in conventional gaming machines, there is a problem in that if the suggested performance does not give the player the expectation of winning, it is difficult to view the symbol variation display while maintaining expectations for the result of the symbol variation display.

The following invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that can improve the interest in symbol variation display accompanied by a suggestive effect that suggests to the player the result of a determination regarding a game. The purpose is to provide.

(B1) a determination information acquisition means for acquiring determination information used in a predetermined determination regarding a game when a predetermined condition is met;
determination means for making a determination regarding the game using the determination information;
A display means capable of displaying a display effect including a symbol fluctuation display from when a plurality of symbols start fluctuating in a state where they are combined with a symbol corresponding to the symbol until it stops at a combination indicating a determination result by the determining means. and,
If the determination result indicates that the symbol variation display is stopped at a winning combination, a winning variation pattern is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns indicating the variation mode of the symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display is determined to be a winning variation pattern. If the determination result indicates that the pattern will be stopped at a winning combination, a winning variation pattern is determined, and after the symbol variation display is temporarily stopped at a winning combination, the symbol variation display is stopped at a winning combination. variation pattern determining means for determining a special variation pattern when the determination result indicates that a special variation is to be executed;
Suggestion performance determining means for determining a predetermined suggestion performance from among a plurality of suggestion performances that suggest that the symbol variation display may match the winning combination;
Suggestion effect execution means for executing the predetermined suggestion effect determined by the suggestion effect determination means,
When the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means is the special variation pattern, the suggested effect determination means determines that there is a possibility that the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means is the special variation pattern. Deciding to execute a special suggestion effect that suggests something to the player,
The suggestive effect execution means stops the symbol variation display in a ready-to-reach state in which the winning combination is set except for one remaining symbol among the plurality of symbols, and the remaining one symbol becomes the winning combination. This gaming machine is characterized in that the special suggestion performance is executed after the out-of-reach situation occurs and when the symbol variation display stops with the symbol indicating the out-of-reach state being combined with the symbol.

According to the gaming machine described in (B1) above, the symbol fluctuation display is such that in a ready-to-reach state where all but one remaining symbol out of a plurality of symbols is a winning combination, the remaining one symbol becomes a winning combination. After becoming out of the reach to stop and when the symbol variation display stops in a state where the symbol indicating the out of reach state is combined with the picture, a special suggestion performance is executed by the suggestion performance execution means. After the symbol fluctuation display becomes out of reach due to an out-of-reach combination of symbols, if the symbol fluctuation display stops while the symbol indicating out-of-reach is combined with the symbol, the out-of-reach combination of the symbol fluctuation display is confirmed. Or, since the timing is such that the player thinks that it is a waiting period until the next time when multiple symbols are combined with a symbol and starts to fluctuate, the player does not expect that a suggestive effect will be performed. It is possible to suggest to the player that the variation pattern may be a special variation pattern at a timing when the variation pattern does not occur. In addition, after the symbol fluctuation display becomes out of reach due to an out-of-reach combination of symbols, the fluctuation pattern is special until the last moment of the symbol fluctuation display when the symbol fluctuation display stops with the symbol indicating out of reach being combined with the symbol. It is possible to show a display effect including a symbol variation display while maintaining a sense of expectation for the variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the symbol variation display accompanied by a suggestive effect that suggests to the player the result of the determination regarding the game.

(B2) In the gaming machine described in (B1) above,
A gaming machine characterized by combining the configurations of the gaming machines described in any one of (A5), (A7), (A8) to (A15) above.

According to the gaming machine described in (B2) above, the same effect as the gaming machine described in any one of (A5), (A7), (A8) to (A15) is achieved.

<Third task>
Conventionally, typical examples of gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines.

This type of gaming machine, for example, acquires judgment information used for a predetermined judgment regarding a game when a predetermined condition is satisfied, makes a judgment regarding the game using the judgment information, and displays symbol fluctuation based on the result of the judgment. There are some that display on a display device. In addition, some gaming machines of this type execute a reach display effect that suggests the result of the determination to the player after the reach is established in the symbol variation display (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-33922 reference).

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in conventional gaming machines, there is a problem in that if the ready-to-win display performance does not provide a good expectation of winning, it is difficult to view the symbol variation display while maintaining expectations for the result of the symbol variation display.

The following invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a symbol variation display accompanied by a reach display effect that indicates to the player the result of a determination regarding a game. The purpose is to provide

(C1) a determination information acquisition means for acquiring determination information used in a predetermined determination regarding a game when a predetermined condition is met;
determination means for making a determination regarding the game using the determination information;
A symbol fluctuation display from when a plurality of symbols start to fluctuate until they stop at a combination indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a reach where the winning combination is achieved except for one remaining symbol among the plurality of symbols. A display means capable of displaying a reach display effect executed after establishment;
If the determination result indicates that the symbol variation display is stopped at a winning combination, a winning variation pattern is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns indicating the variation mode of the symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display is determined to be a winning variation pattern. If the determination result indicates that the pattern will be stopped at a winning combination, a winning variation pattern is determined, and after the symbol variation display is temporarily stopped at a winning combination, the symbol variation display is stopped at a winning combination. variation pattern determining means for determining a special variation pattern when the determination result indicates that a special variation is to be executed;
Suggestion performance determining means for determining a predetermined suggestion performance from among a plurality of suggestion performances that suggest that the symbol variation display may match the winning combination;
Suggestion effect execution means for executing the predetermined suggestion effect determined by the suggestion effect determination means,
When the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means is the special variation pattern, the suggested effect determination means determines that there is a possibility that the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means is the special variation pattern. deciding to execute a special suggestion effect that suggests something to the player before the special variation is executed;
When the special suggestion performance is determined by the suggestion performance determination means, the suggestion performance execution means uses a display mode that is different from the display format when the winning variation pattern is determined in the reach display performance. The gaming machine is characterized in that the special suggestion effect determined by the suggestion effect determination means is executed from the time when the event becomes discernible to a player until the special variation is executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (C1) above, when it is made possible for the player to identify that the display mode is different from the display mode when the winning variation pattern is determined in the display performance, the specific display This is the timing at which the player can be made to think that the effect will not be the pattern for aligning the symbol fluctuation displays in a winning combination, so there is a possibility that the fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern at the timing when the player is about to give up. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a As a result, even after the player can identify that the display mode is different from the display mode when the winning variation pattern is determined in the display performance until the special variation is executed, the variation pattern remains unchanged. A reach display performance can be shown in the symbol variation display while maintaining expectations for the special variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the symbol variation display accompanied by the reach display effect that indicates to the player the result of the determination regarding the game.

(C2) In the gaming machine described in (C1) above,
After the above-mentioned reach is established, when it is made possible for the player to identify that the display mode is different from the display mode when the above-mentioned winning fluctuation pattern has been determined in the above-mentioned display performance, the above-mentioned winning variation in the above-mentioned reach display performance is determined. A gaming machine characterized in that when specific display information that can be identified by a player is displayed in a display mode different from a display mode when a pattern is determined.

According to the gaming machine described in (C2) above, the specific display information that allows the player to identify that the display mode is different from the display mode when the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the reach display performance is provided. When displayed, it can be suggested to the player that the variation pattern may be a special variation pattern. Therefore, even after the player can identify that the display format is different from the display format when the winning variation pattern has been determined in the reach display performance, until the special variation is executed, the variation pattern is A display performance including a reach display performance can be shown while maintaining expectations for the special variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the symbol variation display accompanied by the reach display effect.

(C3) In the gaming machine described in (C2) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific display information is out-of-reach display information that allows the player to identify that the remaining symbol is in a display mode in the out-of-reach combination in the out-of-reach display performance.

According to the gaming machine described in (C3), the specific display information is out-of-reach display information that allows the player to identify that the remaining symbol is in an out-of-reach combination in the out-of-reach display performance. , it is possible to suggest to the player that the fluctuation pattern may be a special fluctuation pattern at the timing when the player is disappointed after seeing the out-of-reach display information. Therefore, even after the out-of-reach display information is displayed in the reach display performance until the special fluctuation is executed, the expectation that the fluctuation pattern is the special fluctuation pattern is maintained, and the reach display performance is included. Display performance can be shown. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the symbol variation display accompanied by the reach display performance.

(C4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C3) above,
A gaming machine characterized by combining the configurations of the gaming machines described in any one of (A5), (A7), (A8) to (A15) above.

According to the gaming machine described in (C4) above, the same effect as the gaming machine described in any one of (A5), (A7), (A8) to (A15) is achieved.

<4th task>
Conventionally, typical examples of gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines.

This type of gaming machine, for example, acquires judgment information used for a predetermined judgment regarding a game when a predetermined condition is satisfied, makes a judgment regarding the game using the judgment information, and displays symbol fluctuation based on the result of the judgment. There are some that display on a display device. In addition, this type of gaming machine executes a reach display performance that suggests the result of the determination to the player after the reach is established in the symbol variation display, and indicates the result of the determination to the player during the reach display performance. There is a system that executes a suggestive information display effect that suggests that the result of the determination is an advantageous result for the player by changing the display mode of the suggestive information (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-33922 (see official bulletin).

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, in conventional gaming machines, unless the display mode of suggestion information changes to the mode desired by the player, it is difficult to view the symbol variation display while maintaining expectations for the result of the symbol variation display. There's a problem.

The following invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and improves the interest of a symbol variation display that accompanies a suggestive information display performance in which the display mode of suggestive information that suggests the result of a judgment regarding a game changes. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can.

(D1) a determination information acquisition means for acquiring determination information used in a predetermined determination regarding a game when a predetermined condition is met;
determination means for making a determination regarding the game using the determination information;
a display means having a display screen capable of displaying a display effect including a symbol fluctuation display from when a plurality of symbols start to fluctuate in front of a normal background until they stop at a combination indicating a determination result by the determination means;
If the determination result indicates that the symbol variation display is stopped at a winning combination, a winning variation pattern is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns indicating the variation mode of the symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display is determined to be a winning variation pattern. If the determination result indicates that the pattern will be stopped at a winning combination, a winning variation pattern is determined, and after the symbol variation display is temporarily stopped at a winning combination, the symbol variation display is stopped at a winning combination. variation pattern determining means for determining a special variation pattern when the determination result indicates that a special variation is to be executed;
Suggestion performance determining means for determining a predetermined suggestion performance from among a plurality of suggestion performances that suggest that the symbol variation display may match the winning combination;
Suggestion effect execution means for executing the predetermined suggestion effect determined by the suggestion effect determination means,
When the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means is the special variation pattern, the suggested effect determination means determines that there is a possibility that the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means is the special variation pattern. deciding to execute a special suggestion effect that suggests something to the player before the special variation is executed;
When the special suggestion performance is determined by the suggestion performance determining means, the suggestion performance execution means displays the symbol variation display to indicate that the probability of the winning combination being the same is a predetermined height. Suggestion information suggested in the symbol variation is made difficult to see for the player at a predetermined timing during display of the symbol variation, and from the time the winning combination is stopped in front of the normal background until the special variation is executed. When the suggestion information is made easily visible to the player again, it is suggested that the possibility of winning the jackpot combination suggested by the suggestion information is higher than the predetermined height. A game machine characterized in that the specific suggestion effect is executed by:

According to the gaming machine described in (D1), when the special suggestion performance is determined by the suggestion performance determination means, the symbol variation display indicates that the probability that the symbol variation display will be a winning combination is a predetermined height. By suggesting that the suggested information being displayed is higher than this predetermined height, it is suggested to the player that the variation pattern may be a special variation pattern. Suggestive information that suggests that the probability of the symbol fluctuation display being aligned in a winning combination is at a predetermined height is in a state that is difficult to visually recognize for the player at a predetermined timing during the symbol fluctuation display. Therefore, the player does not have to keep looking at suggestion information that does not suggest that the variation pattern may be a special variation pattern until the end of the symbol variation display. Suggestion information that has been made difficult to see will be made easy to see again after the winning combination is stopped in front of the normal background and before the special variation is executed, so the symbol variation display will be confirmed as the winning combination. Suggestion information is sent to the player again at a suitable timing to suggest a special fluctuation pattern to the player that makes the player think that it is a waiting period until the next symbol fluctuation display starts. can be shown. When the suggestion information is made easier to see for the player again, the possibility of winning the jackpot combination suggested by the suggestion information is higher than before it is made difficult to see, so the player The moment you see the suggestive information again, you can get a hint that it may be a special fluctuation pattern. As a result, while the symbol fluctuations are being displayed, the player can continue to watch the display performance including the symbol fluctuation displays while maintaining the expectation that the symbol fluctuation displays will be in a winning combination, and the winning combination will be displayed. After that, the user can continue to view the display performance including the symbol variation display while maintaining the expectation that the variation pattern is a special variation pattern until the final moment of the symbol variation display. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the symbol variation display accompanied by the suggestive information display performance in which the display mode of the suggestive information that suggests the result of the determination regarding the game changes.

(D2) In the gaming machine described in (D1) above,
In order to make the suggestion information easily visible to the player again, when the symbol variation display is in a ready-to-reach state in which all the symbols except for one remaining symbol among the plurality of symbols are aligned, the remaining one symbol is The special variation is executed after the out-of-reach combination that is stopped so as to become an out-of-reach combination is displayed in front of the out-of-reach background that is displayed during reach, and after the out-of-reach combination is stopped in front of the normal background. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine described in (D2), the suggestion information that is difficult to visually recognize is displayed after the symbol variation display is in the reach state and the out-of-reach combination is displayed in front of the out-of-reach background; From the time the combination is stopped in front of the normal background until the special variation is executed, it becomes easily visible again, so the symbol variation display is confirmed as an out-of-reach combination, or the next symbol variation display starts. Suggestion information can be shown to the player again at a suitable timing for suggesting to the player a special fluctuation pattern that makes the player think that it is a waiting period until the game is played. As a result, while in the reach state, the player can continue to watch the display performance including the symbol fluctuation display while maintaining the expectation that the symbol fluctuation display will be a winning combination, and the out-of-reach combination will be displayed. After that, the user can continue to view the display performance including the symbol variation display while maintaining the expectation that the variation pattern is a special variation pattern until the final moment of the symbol variation display. As a result, it is possible to increase the impact on players who are disappointed with the result of being out of reach.

(D3) In the gaming machine according to (D1) or (D2),
A gaming machine characterized by combining the configurations of the gaming machines described in any one of (A5), (A7), (A8) to (A15) above.

According to the gaming machine described in (D3) above, the same effect as the gaming machine described in any one of (A5), (A7), (A8) to (A15) is achieved.

The present invention, the inventions described in (A1) to (D3) above, each of Examples 1 to 5, and the inventions described in Modified Examples (1) to (8) above may be combined as appropriate unless they are contradictory to each other. It is also possible to adopt a different configuration or a configuration in which the components are replaced as appropriate. In addition, each invention may be modified such that constituent elements thereof may be deleted or such constituent elements may be replaced with constituent elements having an equivalent action or function, as long as this does not contradict the purpose of each invention.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

42...Third symbol display device 42a...Display screen NH...Normal background HD...Balloon image TH...The relevant pending display H1...First pending display H2...Second pending display H3...Third pending display H4...Fourth pending display SZ... Main decorative pattern HZ... Development pattern HH1... Reach development background HH2... Reach development background HH3... Reach development background HH4... Revival background

Claims (1)

a main control means that performs main control regarding the game;
A gaming machine comprising: a sub-control means for performing secondary control according to instructions from the main control means,
The main control means is
determination information acquisition means for acquiring determination information used for determination regarding the game when a predetermined condition is met;
a determination means for making a determination regarding the game using the determination information,
The gaming machine is
comprising a display means capable of displaying a display effect including a symbol fluctuation display from when a plurality of symbols start varying until they stop at a combination indicating a determination result by the determination means;
The sub-control means
If the determination result is a winning result, a winning fluctuation pattern in which the symbol fluctuation display is stopped at a winning combination is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns indicating the fluctuation mode of the symbol fluctuation display, and the determination result is a winning combination. Fluctuation pattern determining means for determining a losing variation pattern in which the symbol variation display is stopped at a winning combination when the result is a winning combination;
Suggestion effect determining means for determining a predetermined suggestion effect from among a plurality of suggestion effects suggesting that the symbol variation display may match the winning combination;
The winning variation pattern includes a special variation stop in which the symbol variation display stops at a specific winning combination among the winning combinations, and a special variation stop in which the symbol variation display stops at a specific winning combination among the winning combinations. Including special winning fluctuation patterns that are executed after being temporarily displayed in winning combinations,
The gaming machine is
comprising a suggestion effect execution means for executing the predetermined suggestion effect determined by the suggestion effect determination means,
The suggested performance determining means may determine that, when the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means is the special winning fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means may be the special winning fluctuation pattern. determines to execute a special suggestion performance that suggests to the player that there is a
After the different winning combinations are displayed in a recognizable first display mode, the suggestion effect execution means changes the display mode of the different winning combinations to a second display mode while maintaining the different winning combinations. and starts the special suggestion effect determined by the suggestion effect determination means in a state in which the different winning combinations that have been changed can be recognized.

Images